WO2005074594A2 - Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers - Google Patents

Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005074594A2
WO2005074594A2 PCT/US2005/003138 US2005003138W WO2005074594A2 WO 2005074594 A2 WO2005074594 A2 WO 2005074594A2 US 2005003138 W US2005003138 W US 2005003138W WO 2005074594 A2 WO2005074594 A2 WO 2005074594A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mixture
grams
trifluoromethyl
tetrafluoro
surfactant composition
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2005/003138
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2005074594A3 (en
Inventor
Janet Boggs
Stephan M. Brandstadter
John Chien
Vimal Sharma
Bradley E. Edwards
Victoria Hedrick
Andrew Jackson
Gregory Leman
Edward Norman
Robert Kaufman
Original Assignee
Great Lakes Chemical Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Great Lakes Chemical Corporation filed Critical Great Lakes Chemical Corporation
Priority to CA002554293A priority Critical patent/CA2554293A1/en
Priority to US10/587,444 priority patent/US7943567B2/en
Priority to EP05712546A priority patent/EP1718722A4/en
Priority to PCT/US2005/003138 priority patent/WO2005074594A2/en
Priority to JP2006551579A priority patent/JP2007526912A/en
Publication of WO2005074594A2 publication Critical patent/WO2005074594A2/en
Publication of WO2005074594A3 publication Critical patent/WO2005074594A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C17/00Preparation of halogenated hydrocarbons
    • C07C17/26Preparation of halogenated hydrocarbons by reactions involving an increase in the number of carbon atoms in the skeleton
    • C07C17/272Preparation of halogenated hydrocarbons by reactions involving an increase in the number of carbon atoms in the skeleton by addition reactions
    • C07C17/278Preparation of halogenated hydrocarbons by reactions involving an increase in the number of carbon atoms in the skeleton by addition reactions of only halogenated hydrocarbons
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C19/00Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms
    • C07C19/08Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C19/00Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms
    • C07C19/08Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine
    • C07C19/10Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine and chlorine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C19/00Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms
    • C07C19/08Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine
    • C07C19/14Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine and bromine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C19/00Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms
    • C07C19/08Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine
    • C07C19/16Acyclic saturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing fluorine and iodine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C21/00Acyclic unsaturated compounds containing halogen atoms
    • C07C21/02Acyclic unsaturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing carbon-to-carbon double bonds
    • C07C21/18Acyclic unsaturated compounds containing halogen atoms containing carbon-to-carbon double bonds containing fluorine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C11ANIMAL OR VEGETABLE OILS, FATS, FATTY SUBSTANCES OR WAXES; FATTY ACIDS THEREFROM; DETERGENTS; CANDLES
    • C11DDETERGENT COMPOSITIONS; USE OF SINGLE SUBSTANCES AS DETERGENTS; SOAP OR SOAP-MAKING; RESIN SOAPS; RECOVERY OF GLYCEROL
    • C11D1/00Detergent compositions based essentially on surface-active compounds; Use of these compounds as a detergent
    • C11D1/004Surface-active compounds containing F
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C11ANIMAL OR VEGETABLE OILS, FATS, FATTY SUBSTANCES OR WAXES; FATTY ACIDS THEREFROM; DETERGENTS; CANDLES
    • C11DDETERGENT COMPOSITIONS; USE OF SINGLE SUBSTANCES AS DETERGENTS; SOAP OR SOAP-MAKING; RESIN SOAPS; RECOVERY OF GLYCEROL
    • C11D3/00Other compounding ingredients of detergent compositions covered in group C11D1/00
    • C11D3/0005Other compounding ingredients characterised by their effect
    • C11D3/0026Low foaming or foam regulating compositions
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C11ANIMAL OR VEGETABLE OILS, FATS, FATTY SUBSTANCES OR WAXES; FATTY ACIDS THEREFROM; DETERGENTS; CANDLES
    • C11DDETERGENT COMPOSITIONS; USE OF SINGLE SUBSTANCES AS DETERGENTS; SOAP OR SOAP-MAKING; RESIN SOAPS; RECOVERY OF GLYCEROL
    • C11D3/00Other compounding ingredients of detergent compositions covered in group C11D1/00
    • C11D3/0005Other compounding ingredients characterised by their effect
    • C11D3/0094High foaming compositions

Definitions

  • Fluorine Compositions Processes for Manufacturing Fluorine Compositions, and Material Treatments, filed January 30th, 2004, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the present invention relates to the field of halogenated compositions, processes for manufacturing halogenated compositions, and, more specifically, fluorinated compositions, processes for manufacturing fluorinated compositions and methods for treating substrates with the fluorinated compositions.
  • compositions such as surfactants and polymers, for example, have incorporated fluorine to affect the performance of the composition when the composition is used as a treatment for materials and when the composition is used to enhance the performance of materials.
  • fluorine for example, surfactants incorporating fluorinated functional groups can be used as fire extinguishants either alone or in formulations such as aqueous film forming foams (AFFF).
  • AFFF aqueous film forming foams
  • Traditional fluorosurfactants such as perfluoro-octyl sulfonate derivatives (PFOS), have linear perfluorinated portions.
  • Polymers incorporating fluorine have been used to treat materials. Exemplary fluorinated treatments include compositions such as Scotchguard ® .
  • SUMMARY Production processes and systems include: a reactor having at least one interior sidewall that includes glass; reacting a halogenated compound with an allyl-comprising compound in the presence of water to form a halogenated intermediate; dehalogenating a portion of a heterohalogenated alcohol to form a homohalogenated alcohol, with the heterohalogenated alcohol including at least two -CF 3 groups and at least one halogen other than fluorine; reacting an alcohol to form an acrylate, with the alcohol including at least two -CF 3 groups and a cyclic group; reacting an olefin with a saturated compound to form a saturated product, with the olefin including at least two -CF 3 groups, the saturated compound including at least two other -CF 3 groups, and the saturated product including both the -CF 3 groups of the olefin and the -CF 3 groups of the saturated compound; and/or reacting a first reactant that includes at least two -CF 3 groups with a second reactant
  • R F compositions such as R F -intermediates, R F -surfactants, R F -monomers, R F -monomer units, R F -metal complexes, R F -phosphate esters, R F -glycols, R F -urethanes, and/or R F -foam stabilizers.
  • the R F portion can include at least two -CF 3 groups, at least three -CF 3 groups, and/or at least two -CF 3 groups and at least two -CH 2 - groups.
  • R F -surfactant compositions such as R F -Q S are provided, with the R F portion having a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than the Q s portion, and Q s having a greater affinity for a second part of the system than the R F portion.
  • Detergents, emulsifiers, paints, adhesives, inks, wetting agents, foamers, and defoamers including the R F -surfactant composition are provided.
  • Production processes including providing a first compound, with the first compound including at least two -CF 3 groups and two hydrogens, and a portion of the first compound representing the R F portion of an R F -surfactant and adding a Q s portion to the R F portion to form the R F -surfactant are provided.
  • Processes for altering a surface tension of a part of a system having at least two parts are provided that include adding a R F -surfactant.
  • Acrylics, resins, and polymers are provided that include a R F -monomer unit, with the R F portion including, for example, a pendant group of the monomer unit.
  • Compositions are provided that include a substrate having a R F -composition thereover.
  • Production processes can include providing a R F -monomer and combining the R F -monomer with another monomer to form an oligomer.
  • exemplary oligomers can include R F -monomer units.
  • R F -metal complexes are provided that can include a metal and a ligand, with the ligand including R F -Q M c- The Q c portion being coordinated with the metal of the complex, for example.
  • R F -phosphate esters are provided that can include R F -Q PE , with the Q PE portion including the phosphorous portion of the ester.
  • R -glycols are provided that can include R F -Q h> with Q h including a hydroxyl portion of the glycol.
  • R F -urethanes are also provided such as R F -Qu > with the Qu portion being the remainder of the urethane.
  • Aqueous Film Forming Foam (“AFFF”) formulations are provided that can include R F -surfactants and/or R F -foam stabilizers.
  • Fig. 1 is a general view of exemplary R F -compositions.
  • Fig. 2 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 3 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 4 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 5 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 6 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 7 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • Fig. 8 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment.
  • R F -compositions include, but are not limited to, R -surfactants, R F -monomers, R F -monomer units, R F -metal complexes, R F -phosphate esters, R F -glycols, R F -urethanes, and or R F -foam stabilizers.
  • poly-anhydrides, acrylics, urethanes, metal complexes, poly-enes, and/or phosphate esters can include R F portions as well.
  • R F -compositions include compositions that have an R F portion and/or R F portions.
  • the R F portion can be R F -groups, such as pendant groups and/or moieties of compositions.
  • the R F portion can include at least two -CF 3 groups and the -CF 3 groups may be terminal.
  • the R F portion can also include both -CF 3 groups and additional groups containing fluorine, such as -CF 2 - groups.
  • the R portion can include a ratio of -CF 2 - groups to -CF 3 groups that is less than or equal to two, such as (CF 3 ) 2 CF- groups.
  • the R portion can also include hydrogen.
  • the R F portion can include two -CF 3 groups and hydrogen, such as (CF 3 ) 2 CH- groups.
  • the R F portion can also include two -CF 3 groups and a -CH 2 - group, in other embodiments.
  • the R F portion can include at least three -CF 3 groups, such as two (CF 3 ) 2 CF- groups.
  • the R F portion can include cyclic groups such as aromatic groups.
  • the R F portion can include at least two -CF 3 groups and at least four carbons with, for example, one of the four carbons including a -CH 2 - group.
  • R F -compositions can demonstrate desirable surface energies, affect the surface tension of solutions to which they are exposed, and/or affect the environmental resistance of materials to which they are applied and/or incorporated.
  • Exemplary compositions include, but are not limited to, substrates having R F ⁇ compositions thereover and/or liquids having R F -compositions therein.
  • R F portions can be incorporated into compositions such as polymers, acrylate monomers and polymers, glycols, fluorosurfactants, and/or AFFF formulations.
  • compositions can be used as dispersing agents or to treat substrates such as textile fabric, textile yarns, leather, paper, plastic, sheeting, wood, ceramic clays, as well as, articles of apparel, wallpaper, paper bags, cardboard boxes, porous earthenware, construction materials such as brick, stone, wood, concrete, ceramics, tile, glass, stucco, gypsum, drywall, particle board, chipboard, carpet, drapery, upholstery, automotive, awning fabrics, and rainwear.
  • R F -compositions can be prepared from R F -intermediates.
  • R F portions can be incorporated into R F -compositions and/or can be starting materials for R F -compositions via R F -intermediates.
  • Exemplary R F - intermediates include an R portion described above, as well as at least one functional portion that allows for incorporation of the R F portion into compositions to form R F -compositions.
  • Functional portions can include halogens (e.g., iodine), mercaptan, thiocyanate, sulfonyl chloride, acid, acid halides, hydroxyl, cyano, acetate, allyl, epoxide, acrylic ester, ether, sulfate, thiol, phosphate, and/or amines, for example.
  • R F -intermediates can include R F -compositions, such as R F -monomers and/or ligands of R F -metal complexes, for example.
  • R F -intermediates can include R F -Q g with R F representing the R F portion and Q g representing, for example, the functional portion, and/or, as another example, an element of the periodic table of elements.
  • Q g is not a proton, methyl, and/or a methylene group.
  • Exemplary R -intermediates include, but are not limited to, those in Table 1 below.
  • Q g (R r CH) n R F R F (R CH)Q g R F -intermediates can also include CF 3 CF 3 R F (R r CH) n Q g R F (CH 2 -9H) n Q g and/or one or both of CF;3 and C 3 , with Ri including at least one carbon atom, such as -CH 2 -, for example.
  • n can be at least 1 and in other embodiments n can be at least 2 and the R F -intermediate can include one or more of
  • 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluorobutane may be obtained, for example, at Matrix Scientific, P.O. Box 25067, Columbia, SC 92994-5067.
  • 2,4-pentadiene can be prepared in an exemplary aspect according to J. Org. Chem., Vol. 35, No. 6, 1970, pp. 2096-2099, herein incorporated by reference.
  • 1 ,1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4-pentadiene can also be prepared according to the following example.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1-trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4-pentadiene can be prepared according to scheme (1) below.
  • pentane 300mL can be placed in a 500mL three neck flask and chilled below -30°C.
  • hexafluoroacetone 60 grams, 0.36 mole
  • propylene 16.2 grams, 0.38 mole
  • anhydrous aluminum trichloride 0.77g, 0.006 mole
  • This mixture can be stirred and the temperature can be allowed to warm to room temperature over a 3 hour period.
  • a 15% (wt/wt) aqueous HCl solution (20 mL) can be added to the mixture, and the mixture can be washed 3 times with H 2 O.
  • the aqueous layer after the wash, can be decanted off, and the organic layer (pentane and propylene) can be dried with MgSO 4 . Remaining pentane and propylene can be flash vaporized off at 60°C to give 54.4 grams (70% area percent by gas chromatography) of isomeric 1 ,1 -bis(trifluoromethyl)-3-penten-1 -ol.
  • the crude 1 ,1 -bis(trifluoromethyl)-3-penten-1 -ol (54 grams) can be placed in a 250mL three-neck flask and 125mL of concentrate H 2 SO 4 added to form a mixture which can be stirred and heated slowly to 95°C (separating compounds having lower boiling points from the mixture between 34°C and 55°C).
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4- pentadiene (15.6 grams, 45.5% yield) produced can be separate from the mixture as a gas between 70°C and 74°C.
  • Exemplary R F ⁇ intermediates can be prepared from the reactant 2-iodoheptafluoropropane.
  • halogenated compounds such as 2-iodoheptafluoropropane can be prepared with reference to Fig. 2.
  • a system 20 is depicted that includes a reactor 22 coupled to an alkyl reactant reservoir 24, a halogenating agent reservoir 26, and a halogenated compound reservoir 28.
  • system 20 can be used to halogenate an alkyl reactant with a halogenating agent within reactor 22 to form a halogenated compound.
  • Alkyl reactant within alkyl reactant reservoir 24 can include an olefin such as a fluoro-olefin, for example hexafluoropropene.
  • Halogenating agent within halogenating agent reservoir 26 can include a mixture of a salt and a diatomic halogen, such as KF and l 2 , KF and Br 2 , and salts such as ammonium salts, for example.
  • reactor 22 can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy ® , such as hastelloy ® C.
  • conduits 29 can be configured to provide the contents of reservoirs 24 and 26 to reactor 22 and/or provide the contents of reactor 22 to reservoir 28.
  • Conduits 29 can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy ® , such as hastelloy ® C.
  • Conduits 29 and reactor 22 both can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy ® , such as hastelloy ® C, for example.
  • the halogenating agent may be provided to reactor 22 with a reactant media, such as a polar, aprotic solvent including, for example, acetonitrile and/or dimethyl formamide (DMF).
  • the reactant media may be added through another conduit (not shown) or, simultaneously with the halogenating agent, through reservoir 26.
  • the halogenating agent and the reactant media can form a mixture within reactor 22 to which the alkyl reactant can be added to form another mixture that includes the agent, the media, and the reactant.
  • the alkyl reactant can be reacted within this mixture to form the halogenated compound.
  • the reactant media can be in the liquid phase when the alkyl reactant is reacted within the mixture.
  • the mixture may also be agitated when the alkyl reactant is reacted, for example, and the mixture may also be heated.
  • hexafluoropropene may be provided to reactor 22 having KF, l 2 , and acetonitrile therein and a portion of the contents of reactor 22 heated to at least about 90°C, and/or from about 90°C to about 135°C, to form 2-iodoheptafluoropropane.
  • Hexafluoropropene may also be provided to reactor 22 having KF, l 2 , and acetonitrile therein with a pressure within reactor 22 being from about 446 kPa to 929 kPa to form 2-iodoheptafluoropropane.
  • the halogenated compound may also be removed from reactor 22 to reservoir 28 via conduit 29.
  • conduit 29, between reservoir 28 and reactor 22 can include a condenser (not shown). A portion of the halogenated compound formed within reactor 22 can be transformed into a gas, the gas can be transferred to the condenser, the condenser can return the gas to a liquid, and the liquid can be removed from the condenser and transferred to reservoir 28.
  • conduit 29, between reactor 22 and 28, being configured to include the condenser can be referred to as a distillation apparatus.
  • Halogenated compounds such as the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane described above, can be removed from reactor 22 by heating at least a portion of the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane to at least about 40°C. Exemplary halogenated compounds described above may be used to
  • R F -intermediates such as (1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane).
  • 105.14 grams of 2-iodoheptafluoropropane and 10 grams of ethylene can be added to a 800mL Parr reactor.
  • the reactor can be heated to about 180°C for about 6 hours.
  • the reactor can then be cooled and a portion of the contents removed to give about 105.99 grams of the R F -intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodobutane being about 86% pure (as determined by gas chromatography).
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane can also be distilled at 56°C/96 Torr.
  • 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(thfluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane can also be purchased from Matrix Scientific (Catalog number 1104).
  • Halogenated compounds may also be used to prepare R F - intermediates such as the heterohalogenated intermediate 7,8,8,8- tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)-5-iodooct-1 -ene.
  • the R F -intermediate can be prepared and then dehalogenated to form another R F -intermediate according to scheme (2) below.
  • 2-iodoheptafluoropropane (231 .3 grams, 0.782 mole), 1 ,5-hexadiene (126.6g, 0.767 mole), and 2,2'- azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) (13.6g, 0.083 mole) can be charged together into a clean and dry 750mL stainless steel autoclave apparatus equipped with a rupture disc, thermocouple, heater bands, electronic temperature controller, dip-tube with needle valve, gas vent with needle valve, pressure ' gauge, and agitator. The apparatus can then be sealed and heated slowly to about 60°C where an exotherm can be observed and slowly the temperature can be raised to about 80°C.
  • AIBN 2,2'- azobisisobutyronitrile
  • the apparatus contents can be held at 80°C for about 72 hours giving about 337g of crude material.
  • trifluoromethyl-5-iodooct-1 -ene (36.1 grams, 0.095 mole) can be added to a 100mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with a reflux condenser, heating mantle, thermocouple, electronic heat controller, and agitator and heated to 75°C.
  • Tributyltin hydride (34.6 grams, 0.119 mole) can be added drop-wise through an addition funnel over a 3 hour period to form a mixture. An exotherm can be observed during the addition.
  • the mixture can be vacuum distilled (25°C/5.0 Torr) to give 15.6 grams of the R F - intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)oct-1 -ene as a clear liquid having about 99.8% area percent purity (by gas chromatography), and 5.5g of lower purity 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)oct-1 -ene (m/z 252 (M + ), 183 (M + -CF 3 ), 69 (M + -C ⁇ Hn F*), 55 (M + -C 5 H 4 F 7 ));
  • system 30 includes a reactor 32 configured to receive a halogenated compound, such as the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane described above, from a halogenated compound reservoir 33.
  • the halogenated compound can also include at least two CF 3 - groups; at least one (CF 3 ) 2 CF- group; and/or at least two CF 3 - groups and a halogen other than fluorine, for example.
  • Reactor 32 can also be configured to receive an allyl-comprising compound from an allyl- comprising compound reservoir 34, and water from water reservoir 35.
  • the allyl-comprising compound can include an ester such as allyl acetate, for example.
  • the allyl comprising compound can also include an alcohol such as allyl alcohol, as another example.
  • Reactor 32 can be configured to react the halogenated compound with the allyl-comprising compound in the presence of the water to form an R F -intermediate and provide the R F -intermediate to intermediate reservoir 36.
  • the halogenated compound, allyl-comprising compound and the water can be combined in reactor 32 to a form a mixture.
  • a salt such as Na 2 S 2 O 5 , may be added to the water to form an aqueous solution prior to forming the mixture, for example.
  • the salt can be as much as 30% (wt/wt) of the solution.
  • the R F -intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate. Reacting the
  • 2-iodoheptafluoropropane with the allyl acetate in the presence of the solution can include heating at least a portion of the mixture within reactor 32 to at least about 80°C, from about 65°C to about 100°C, and/or from about 80°C to about 90°C.
  • the halogenated compound includes 2-iodoheptafluoropropane
  • the allyl-comprising compound includes allyl alcohol
  • the solution includes Na 2 S 2 O 5
  • the R F -intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol.
  • 2-iodoheptafluoropropane with the allyl alcohol in the presence of the solution can include heating at least a portion of the mixture within reactor 32 to at least about 80°C, from about 65°C to about 100°C, and/or from about 80°C to about 90°C.
  • An initiator may also be provided to reactor 32 to facilitate the reacting of the halogenated compound with the allyl-comprising compound.
  • An exemplary initiator can include AIBN.
  • Reactor 32 can contain from about 0.01 % (wt/wt) to about 10 % (wt/wt), and/or from about 0.1 %(wt/wt) to 5 %(wt/wt), of the initiator.
  • the R F -intermediate can be provided to intermediate reservoir 36 upon formation within reactor 32.
  • Providing the R F -intermediate can include processes for separating the R F -intermediate from the remaining contents of the reactor, those contents including reactants and or by-products.
  • Exemplary methods for providing the R F -intermediate to reservoir 36 can include liquid/liquid separation and/or distillation.
  • the R F -intermediate formed above may also be reacted to form additional intermediates including additional R F -intermediates. For example, a portion of the intermediate can be unsaturated to form a R F -intermediate that includes a halogenated olefin.
  • unsaturating the intermediate can include exposing the intermediate to a reducing agent.
  • the reducing agent can include Zn and/or a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol for example.
  • the Rp-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate may be unsaturated to form the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 - ene, according to one embodiment.
  • the R F -intemnediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate can be combined with a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol, for example, to form another mixture and the other mixture can be heated to at least about 120°C to form the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pent-l-ene.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol can be reacted to form the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene in the presence of a reducing reagent such as a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol.
  • a reducing reagent such as a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol.
  • the reducing agent can include POCI 3 , pyridine , and/or a mixture of POCI 3 and pyridine.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol can be reacted to form the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(thfluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene in the presence of a mixture of POCI 3 and pyridine.
  • This reaction can be performed while maintaining the temperature of the mixture between from about 0°C to about 5°C, for example.
  • (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene) can also be prepared in an exemplary aspect according to Synthesis and Characterization of a New Class of Perfluorinated Alkanes: Tetrabis(perfluoroalkyl)alkane. G. Gambaretto et al., Journal of Fluorine Chemistry, 5892 (2003) pgs 1-7 and United States Patent 3,843,735 to Knell et. al., both of which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene can also be prepared according to scheme (3) below, for example.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-l -ene (2075 grams) can be flashed-off and collected in a 1 L ice trap. The contents of the ice trap can be distilled to give 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene >99.5% (area percent by gas chromatography) (b.p. 54°C).
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl) pent-1 -ene may also be prepared according to scheme (4) below.
  • the mixture can then be cooled and 11 .2 grams of 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2- iodopentan-1 -ol can be removed as an organic layer upon separation.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can have as much as a 93% (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can be added to a glass pressure tube and about 13 grams of 30% (wt/wt) aqueous acetic acid can be added to the other tube to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be heated to about 80°C, and 4 grams of powdered zinc can be added slowly through a solid addition system.
  • the mixture can be allowed to stir for an additional 2 hours before being cooled and adding 2 mL of 1 .5 N HCl to phase separate the mixture.
  • the organic layer can be decanted to give 3 grams of the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ene which can be 75.14% (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • about 254 grams of diethylene glycol and 127.5 grams of Zn powder can be added into a 1000 mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with a dean-stark apparatus, thermometer, and dip tube to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be heated to 120°C while stirring and about 213.81 grams of the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can be slowly pumped subsurface into the mixture. About 111 .4 grams of the
  • R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ene collected which can be 88% (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 - ene can be prepared according to scheme (5) below.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol may be prepared as described above and converted according to scheme (6) below.
  • Portions of the mixture can be drawn, washed in H 2 O, and dried over MgSO 4 , then analyzed by gas chromatography and/or gas chromatography/mass spectrometry.
  • Gas chromatography, gas chromatography/mass spectrometry and 1 H NMR can be utilized to determine the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene.
  • the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene can be used to prepare other R F ⁇ intermediates as well.
  • 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene can be halogenated to form R F -intermediates that include at least two CF 3 - groups and a halogen other than fluorine, such as the Rp-intermediate 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)pentane according to scheme (7) below.
  • Rp-intermediate 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)pentane according to scheme (7) below.
  • 5,5,5-tetrafluoro- -(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)pentane
  • 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene can be loaded into a 50mL auto syringe and vaporized in a heated coil prior to being fed into a quartz tube via a Claisen adaptor, which terminates into a 250mL two-neck round bottom flask equipped with an HBr scrubber containing a 10% (wt/wt) KOH solution.
  • the quartz tube can be equipped with an internal thermocouple and a dry ice and acetone reflux condenser, and surrounded by an ultra violet light (254 nm) carousel.
  • anhydrous HBr can be fed into the quartz tube from a regulated tank through the same Claisen adaptor. Feed rates for HBr and 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene can be set at 39.3 g/hour and 13.4 g/hour, respectively. About 53.94g (0.19 mole) of product can be collected and washed with NaHCO 3 then washed with H 2 O ,and dried over molecular sieves.
  • Samples of the product can be drawn for gas chromatography/mass spectrometry analysis (m/z 290.8 (M + ), 209.0 (M + -HBr), 189.1 (M + -101 .9)).
  • the R F -intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7- (trifluoromethyl)oct-l -ene prepared as described above, for example, can be used to prepare another R F -intermediate including the R F -intermediate such as 8-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)octane according to scheme (8) below.
  • the tube can be sealed, the gaseous anhydrous HBr can be bubbled into the system, and the pressure maintained at about 184kPa.
  • the tube can be irradiated for 3 hours, and the mixture within the tube can be washed with NaHCO 3, then twice with water and dried over molecular sieves to yield about 68.89 grams (0.21 mole) of the R F -intermediate 8-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)octane.
  • R F -intermediates having alcohol functionality can be used as starting material to produce additional R F -intermediates.
  • R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 2-iodopentan-1-ol, described above, may be dehalohydrogenated.
  • R F -intermediates such as the heterohalogenated compound 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol that include at least two CF 3 - groups and a halogen other than fluorine, may be dehalohydrogenated to form a homohalogenated alcohol.
  • the dehalohydrogenating can include exposing the intermediate to tributyltin hydride, for example.
  • the R F -intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-
  • 2-iodopentan-1-ol and the alcohol can include according to scheme (9) below.
  • a 500mL two neck round bottom flask can be equipped with a thermocouple, agitator, and heating mantle.
  • About 212.1 g (0.599 mole) 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4(trifluoromethyl)-2- iodopentan-1 -ol (212.1 g, 0.599 mole) can be added to the flask and heated to about 60°C to 70°C.
  • about 196.4g(0.675 mole) tributyltin hydride can be added drop-wise over a 4 hour period followed by 2 hours of continued heating and stirring.
  • R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol can be obtained through vacuum distillation and verified by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (m/z 228 (M + ), 211 (M + -OH), 159 (M + - CF3)).
  • Still another R F -intermediate, e.g., 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl) Pentanol may be prepared in accordance with the procedures described in scheme (10) below and detailed in US patent 3,467,247, herein incorporated by reference.
  • a R F -intermediate having alcohol functionality such as the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l-ol and/or 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol described above may be reacted with a halogenated olefin to form another R F -intermediate such as an allyl-ether compound.
  • the R F -intermediate can include at least two CF 3 - groups; at least one (CF 3 ) 2 CF- group; and/or at least three CF 3 - groups.
  • halogenated olefins include olefins that include a halogen other than fluorine such as bromine, for example. 3-bromoprop-1 -ene may be used as a halogenated olefin.
  • the halogenated olefin may be exposed to the alcohol in the presence of a basic solution, such as an aqueous KOH solution.
  • a basic solution such as an aqueous KOH solution.
  • a mixture of the alcohol, the halogenated olefin, and a reactant media including a phase transfer catalyst, such as tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulfate may be prepared, and the basic solution can be added to this mixture while maintaining the mixture below at least 10°C.
  • R F -intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol may be prepared by reacting the R F -intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol with 3-bromoprop-1-ene in accordance with the above and scheme (11) below.
  • a 500mL three-neck flask can be equipped with a thermometer, agitator, and a condenser.
  • About 40.86g of NaOH can be dissolved in 120g of deionized H 2 O to form a mixture.
  • To the mixture can be added about 170.1 grams of hexafluoroisopropan-2-ol. After about 15 minutes, 100.5 grams of 3-bromoprop-1-ene can be added to the mixture at room temperature.
  • the mixture can be agitated for about 2 days. The mixture can then
  • halogenated intermediates including the allyl-
  • ether compound may be prepared by reacting the
  • the mixture can be chilled to about 10°C, and 50% (wt/wt) KOH (400 grams) can be added over a 2 hour period. The mixture can then be allowed to stir at 10°C for about 72 hours. After the 72 hours, an additional 100mL of 33% (wt/wt) KOH can be added, and the mixture can be agitated for an additional 12 hours.
  • the reaction can be monitored by removing portions and analyzing, using gas chromatography, and after nondetection of 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol, the mixture can be washed one time with H 2 O, twice with 10% (wt/wt) HCl, and one more time with H 2 O.
  • R F -intermediate including the homohalogenated alcohol such as 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l-ol described above, may be reacted to form an acrylate.
  • the homohalogenated alcohol can be exposed to an acryloyl compound, for example, to form the acrylate.
  • the homohalogenated alcohol can include 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol and the acryloyl compound can include acryloyl chloride.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol can be reacted with the acryloyl chloride in the presence of a basic solution while maintaining the temperature of the solution at about 0°C to form the R F -intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-yl acrylate, for example, according to scheme (13) below.
  • a lOOOmL three-neck flask can be equipped with a thermometer, agitator, and dropping funnel with a dip tube.
  • Into the flask can be added about 130.6 grams of acryloyl chloride, 168.8 grams 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol, and 1 gram of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol to form a mixture.
  • About 30% (wt/wt) oleum can then be added to the mixture through the dip tube while maintaining the mixture at 60°C- 75°C.
  • the mixture can be maintained at 60°C- 70°C for about 4 hours.
  • Single stage vacuum distillation of the mixture can yield about 183 grams of crude product 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2- yl acrylate being about 95.7% (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • the crude 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-yl can be distilled further to increase purity to 99.7% (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • the halogenated intermediate including the homohalogenated alcohol such as 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1-ol described above, may be reacted to form an acrylate.
  • the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l -ol can be exposed to acryloyl chloride according to
  • a R F -intermediate can be prepared by reacting an alcohol having at least two CF 3 - groups and a cyclic group such as 3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl alcohol to form an acrylate. The alcohol can be reacted with an acryloyl compound such as acryloyl chloride to form the acrylate.
  • the acrylate can include For example, and by way of example only, 200mL of CH 2 CI 2 and 25 grams of 3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl alcohol can be placed in a 500mL flask to form a mixture. While stirring the mixture, about 13.8 grams of triethylamine can be added to the mixture. The mixture can then be cooled down in an ice bath and 10.5mL acryloyl chloride can slowly be added to the mixture. The mixture can then be stirred for about an hour and then quenched with an aqueous HCl solution. The mixture can be allowed to phase separate and the organic layer can be washed with saturated KCI solution and dried over MgSO 4 . The organic solvent can be removed by
  • R F -intermediates having a cyclic group can also be prepared.
  • one reactant including at least two CF 3 - groups such as a heterohalogenated intermediate can be reacted with another reactant including a cyclic group, such as phenol, to form a R F -intermediate that includes at least two CF 3 - groups and a cyclic group.
  • the one reactant can include an alcohol such as the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol prepared above.
  • the R F -intermediate can be prepared
  • a Rp-intermediate can be prepared that is heterohalogenated and contains a cyclic group according to scheme (16) below.
  • the resulting solution can be heated 97°C and 110 g (0.281 mole) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodopentane can be added drop-wise and sub-surface via syringe pump over the course of 2 hr period.
  • the resulting product can be collected in the overhead collection flask and the reaction can be continued to be heated until the overhead temperature reached 94°C.
  • the collected material can be dried over magnesium sulfate to give 74.18 g of crude reaction product which by GC analysis consisted on primary product and starting material.
  • 5-(trifluoromethyl)-6-(perfluoropropan-2-yl)bicycle[2.2.1]hept-2- ene yields can be greater than 12 (area percent by gas chromatography).
  • Reaction sample can also be analyzed by gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy. (m/z 330 (M + ), 261 (M + - CF 3 ), 161 (M + - (CF 3 ) 2 CF)).
  • a system 40 is shown for preparing R F - intermediates that includes reagents such as a taxogen 42, a telogen 44, and an initiator 46 being provided to a reactor 48 to form a product such as a telomer 49.
  • system 40 can perform a telomerization process.
  • taxogen 42 can be exposed to telogen 44 to form telomer 49.
  • taxogen 42 can be exposed to telogen 44 in the presence of initiator 46.
  • Reactor 48 can also be configured to provide heat to the reagents during the exposing.
  • Taxogen 42 can include at least one CF 3 -comprising compound.
  • the CF 3 -comprising compound can have a C-2 group having at least one pendant CF 3 - group.
  • taxogen 42 can include an olefin, such as trifluoropropene.
  • Taxogen 42 can also include 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-6- (trifluoromethyl)hept-l -ene, for example.
  • Telogen 44 can include halogens such as fluorine and/or chlorine.
  • Telogen 44 can include at least four fluorine atoms and can be represented as R F -Q and/or R C ⁇ -Q.
  • the R F can be as described above and can include at least four fluorine atoms, and the Q group can include one or more atoms of the periodic table of elements.
  • the Q group can be H or I with the R F group being (CF 3 ) 2 CF- and/or -C e F 13 , for example.
  • R F -Q can be 2- iodofluoropropane, for example.
  • the R C ⁇ group can include at least one - CCI 3 group.
  • Exemplary telogens can include the halogenated compounds described above, such as (CF 3 ) 2 CFI, C 6 F 13 I, and/or trichloromethane.
  • taxogen 42 can include trifluoropropene and telogen 44 can include (CF 3 ) 2 CFI, with a mole ratio of taxogen 42 to telogen 44 being from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1 , from about 1 :1 to about 5:1 , and/or from about 2:1 to about 4:1 .
  • Taxogen 42 can include 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-6- (trifluoromethyl)hept-l -ene
  • telogen 44 can include (CF 3 ) 2 CFI, for example.
  • Reactor 48 can be any lab-scale or industrial-scale reactor and, in certain embodiments, reactor 48 can be configured to control the temperature of the reagents therein. According to exemplary embodiments reactor 48 can be used to provide a temperature during the exposing of the reagents of from about 90°C to about 180°C, 60°C to about 220°C and/or 1 30°C to about 1 50°C and, according to other embodiments, reactor 48 can be configured to maintain the temperature of the reagents at about 90°C. Telomer 49, produced upon exposing taxogen 42 to telogen 44, can include
  • the R ⁇ group can include at least one C-2 group having -CH 2 -CH- a pendant group that includes at least one -CF 3 group, such as CF 3 .
  • Exemplary telomers 49 can include r3 , 3 ancj/or one or bQth Qf Q a (R CH) n R F Q g (CH 2 -CH) n R F PF PF 3 and, 3 , with R F including at least one carbon atom, such as -CH 2 -, for example.
  • n can be at least 1 and in other embodiments n can be at least 2 and the product can include one or more of CF R F (CH 2 -CH-CH 2 -CH)Q 3.
  • telogen (CF 3 ) 2 CFI to form the telomer anc
  • trifluoropropene can be exposed to the telogen C 6 F 13 I to form the C ⁇ Fi 3 (CH 2 -CH) n l telomer CF 3
  • the taxogen trifluoropropene can also be exposed to the telogen CCI 3 H to form the telomer CCI 3 (CH 2 -CH) n H CF 3 _ products having n being at least 2 can be formed when utilizing an excess of the taxogen as compared to the telogen.
  • At least a 2:1 mole ratio of the taxogen to the telogen can be utilized to obtain products having n being at least 2.
  • at least two moles of the taxogen trifluoropropene can be exposed to at least one mole of the telogen (CF 3 ) 2 CF(CH 2 -9H-CH 2 -9H)I (CF 3 ) 2 CFI to form one or both of the telomers CF 3 CF 3 anC
  • CF 3 ) 2 CF(CH 2 -9H-CH 2 -9H)I (CF 3 ) 2 CFI to form one or both of the telomers CF 3 CF 3 anC
  • initiator 46 may be provided to reactor 48 during the exposing of the reagents.
  • Initiator 46 can include thermal, photochemical (UV), radical, and/or metal complexes, for example, including a peroxide, such as di-tert-butyl peroxide.
  • Initiator 66 can also include catalysts, such as Cu.
  • Initiator 46 and taxogen 42 can be provided to reactor 48 at a mole ratio of initiator 46 to taxogen 42 of from between about 0.001 to about 0.05 and/or from between about 0.01 to about 0.03, for example.
  • Initiator 46 and taxogen 42 can be provided to reactor 48 at a mole ratio of initiator 46 to taxogen 42 of from between about 0.001 to about 0.05 and/or from between about 0.01 to about 0.03, for example
  • various initiators 46 and telogens 44 can be used to telomerize taxogen 42 as referenced in Table 2 below.
  • Telomerizations utilizing photochemical and/or metal-complex initiators 46 can be carried out in batch conditions using Carius tube reactors 48.
  • Telomerizations utilizing thermal, peroxide, and/or metal complex initiators 46 can be carried out in 160mL and/or 500mL Hastelloy ® reactors 48.
  • Telogen 44 (neat and/or as a peroxide solution) can be provided as a gas at a temperature from about 60 °C to about 180 °C and a telogen 44 [T] 0 /taxogen 42 [Tx] 0 initial molar ratio R 0 can be varied from 0.25 to 3.0 and the reaction time from 2 to 22 hrs.
  • the product mixture can be analyzed by gas chromatography and/or the product can be distilled into different fractions and analyzed by 1 H and 19 F NMR and/or 13 C NMR.
  • Initiators can be Perk. 16s(t-butyl cyclohexyl dicarbonate); AIBN; Trig.101 (2,5-bis-(t-butyl peroxy)-2,5-dimethylhexane); and DTBP.
  • the taxogen trifluoropropene can be combined with the telogen 2-iodofluoropropane to form the telomer 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5- heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane according to scheme (18) below.
  • telogen 1 ,1 ,1 , 2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5, 6,6-tridecafluoro-6- iodohexane can be combined with the taxogen trifluoropropene to form the telomer 1 ,1 , 1 ,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5, 6,6,9,9, 9-hexadecafluoro-8-iodononane according to scheme (19) below.
  • a taxogen including at least two CF 3 - groups such as the Rp-intermediates 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7- tetrafluoro-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene can be combined with a telogen including a saturated compound having at least two CF 3 - groups to form a telomer including a saturated compound according to scheme (20) below.
  • AIBN (0.51 grams) can be added, and the mixture can be heated to and maintained at 85°C for 24 hours. During heating, additional AIBN can be added (0.11 grams after 3 hours and another 0.1 grams after 21 hours). The mixture can then be washed twice with H 2 O and analysis via gas chromatography can yield a 56% area percent purity.
  • R F -intermediates including the telomers, can be further modified to form additional R F -intermediates.
  • R F -intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5- heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be modified according to scheme (22) below to produce additional intermediates as shown below.
  • a 500 mL three-neck flask can be equipped with an agitator, thermocouple, reflux condenser, and septa.
  • About 483 grams (1.23 mole) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be added to the flask.
  • About 12.4 grams (0.08 mole) AIBN can be added to a syringe pump containing about 123 grams (1.23 mole) allyl acetate to form a mixture.
  • the syringe pump can be connected to the flask via a Teflon tube fed through the septa.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodopentane can be maintained at about 80°C to 90°C.
  • the allyl acetate and AIBN mixture in the syringe pump can be charged (fed) into the flask at a rate of 15 mL per hour.
  • the mixture can be sampled and analyzed by gas chromatography to find 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6- bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate having about 78.3% area percent purity.
  • a three-neck 250 mL flask can be equipped with a thermocouple, agitator, 50 mL pressure equalizing addition funnel, and a short path distillation apparatus.
  • About 150 grams of diethylene glycol and 26.01 grams (0.4 mole) zinc can be added to the flask to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be maintained at about 50°C to 65°C and a vacuum can be maintained at about 5.3 kPa to 8.7 kPa.
  • 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate can be placed into the 50 mL addition funnel and added drop-wise over about 1 hour.
  • 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate addition 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)hept-1-ene can be reactively distilled and collected in a 50 mL receiver flask.
  • System 50 can be utilized for the production of telomers that include ester functionality.
  • System 50 can include a reactor 56 that is configured to receive reagents such as an ester 54 and a telomer 52, as well as, in other embodiments, an initiator 59.
  • Telomer 52 can be fluorinated and can be represented by the general formula Q 1 (R T ) n Q 2 -
  • the Q ⁇ and Q 2 groups can include one or more atoms of the periodic table of elements including Q and/or Q g and according to exemplary embodiments, the Q ⁇ and Q 2 groups need not be different nor need they be identical.
  • the Qi group in exemplary embodiments, can include at least one -CF 3 group, and in other embodiments at least two -CF 3 groups.
  • the Qi group can also include a -CF(CF 3 ) 2 group in one embodiment and a -C 6 F ⁇ 3 group in other embodiments.
  • the Q 2 group can include halogens in certain embodiments and in other embodiments can include hydrogen.
  • Telomer 52 can include R F -intermediates including telomer 49 described above, such as (CF 3 ) 2 CF(CH 2 -9H) n l C 6 F 13 (CH 2 -9H) n l CCI 3 (CH 2 -CH) n H CF 3 j CF 3 ( and/or CF 3 , for example.
  • Ester
  • initiator 59 can be utilized within reactor 46 during the exposing of ester 54 to telomer 52.
  • Initiator 29 can include compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN), peroxides such as: dibenzoyl peroxide, tert-amyl peroxypivalate, tert-butyl peroxypivalate, DTBP (di-tert-butyl peroxide), and/or a metal complex such as copper chloride, ferric chloride, palladium and/or ruthenium complexes can also be used.
  • AIBN azobisisobutyronitrile
  • peroxides such as: dibenzoyl peroxide, tert-amyl peroxypivalate, tert-butyl peroxypivalate, DTBP (di-tert-butyl peroxide)
  • DTBP di-tert-butyl peroxide
  • a metal complex such as copper chloride, ferric chloride,
  • Ester 54 can be exposed to telomer 52 to form an ester-comprising telomer 58.
  • Ester-comprising telomer 58 can include the composition Q I (RT) ⁇ R E , with the R E group including at least one ester group and/or Q g , such as an acetate group.
  • telomer 52 can include the formula R F (RT) ⁇ Q 2 , with the R F group including at least one fluorine atom such as a -CF 3 group and/or as described above.
  • R F (R ⁇ ) n Q 2 can be exposed to ester 54 to form an ester-comprising telomer 58 such as R F (R T )R E , for
  • the telomer can b e exposed to the ester allyl acetate to form the ester-comprising telomer (CF 3 ) 2 CF(CH 2 -9H) n CH 2 CHCH 2 OCCH 3 CF 3 I O .
  • reagents within reactor 56 can be heated to at least 82°C for approximately 10 hours during the exposing of the reagents.
  • the reagents can also be exposed in the presence of AIBN at the same temperature for the same amount of time, for example.
  • the process of system 50 can be exothermic and the initiator may prevent achieving a temperature that may decompose and/or rearrange products.
  • the reaction temperature of ester and telomer can rise to about 160°C -180°C, and at such high temperature the ester obtained can undergo a thermal rearrangement to R F CH 2 CH(OAc)CH 2 l, for example.
  • AIBN can be used as the initiator and added stepwise to avoid such a rearrangement and provide a product yield up to 80-82% (by gas chromatography) or 75% (by distillation). Referring to Fig.
  • system 60 includes a reactor 62 configured to receive reagents such as a telomer 64 and a reducing agent 66 and form an allyl-comprising telomer 68.
  • Telomer 64 can include R F -intermediates such as ester-comprising telomer 58 described above.
  • telomer 64 can include a Q (R ⁇ ) n RE, such as
  • Reducing agent 66 can include one or more reagents, such as a mixture of activated zinc and methanol. Other reducing agents may be utilized.
  • Reactor 62 can be configured to expose agent 66 to telomer 64 at approximately 65°C and reflux these materials for approximately 3 hours, plus or minus 2 hours.
  • telomer 64 such as CF 3 I O t C an be added to reactor 62 containing a 2-fold excess of activated Zn dust in MeOH solution.
  • Reactor 62 may be configured to stir and/or even vigorously stir the solution during and/or after addition of telomer 64.
  • the reaction of the telomer 64 with agent 66 can be exothermic and telomer 64 can be added drop-wise under reflux of MeOH to control exotherms, if desired.
  • the conversion of telomer 64 can be quantitative with the overall yield of allyl-comprising telomer 68 being approximately 75% after distillation, for example.
  • allyl-comprising telomer 68 can include Q I (R T ) ⁇ R A , with the R A group including Q g as described above and/or at least one allyl group.
  • Allyl- comprising telomer 68 can include R F (R ⁇ ) n R A , and as such, include at least one fluorine atom.
  • Allyl-comprising telomer 68 can be used as a monomer in the formation of polymers, for example.
  • systems 40, 50, and 60 can be aligned sequentially to produce an allyl-comprising telomer 68 from taxogen 42 and telogen 44, when referring to Figs. 4, 5, and 6 in sequence.
  • telomer 49 produced in system 40 can be utilized as telomer 52 in system 50
  • telomer 58 produced in system 50 can be utilized as telomer 64 in system 60.
  • 68 can include a fluoromonomer that includes a telomer of trifluoropropene.
  • 49, 52, 64, and 68 can include with n being at least 1.
  • n being at least 1.
  • telomers, esters, and monomers having the recited characteristics can be produced.
  • the Rp-intermediate including the telomers described above can be modified according to scheme (24) below.
  • a 150mL three-neck round bottom flask can be equipped with a reflux condenser, agitator, thermocouple, heating mantle, and a 150mL pressure equalized addition funnel that can contain 70 mL of allylmagnesium bromide in a 1.OM solution of diethyl ether.
  • About 27.64 grams (0.07 mole) of 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be added to the flask.
  • the allylmagnesium bromide solution can be added slowly to the flask wherein an exotherm can be observed along with a change in color from orange to colorless.
  • the allylmagnesium bromide can be added over a period of 2.5 hours then the reaction mixture can be held at room temperature overnight. After the hold period, the reaction mixture can be washed in water to quench any unreacted allylmagnesium bromide, an organic layer can be observed, decanted off, and dried over MgSO 4 . Samples of dried organic layer can be analyzed by gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy. (m/z 306 (M + ), 237 (M + -CF 3 )).
  • R F -intermediates including the telomers described above can be modified to form additional R F -intermediates.
  • the Rp- intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,6,7,7,7-octafluoro-2,6-bis (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodoheptane can be modified to form the R F -intermediate 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene according to scheme (25) below.
  • a dried flask can be charged with (488 grams) and anhydrous ether (306 mLI) to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be cooled to 0 ° C with an ice/water bath and 1 M allylmagnesium bromide in ether (976mL) can be added slowly to the mixture over 3 hours and the mixture allowed to warm to room temperature overnight.
  • Saturated ammonium chloride 500mL can then be added drop-wise to the mixture at a rate to keep the temperature of the mixture at ⁇ 5°C, and deionized water (250mL) can be added to aid in the dissolution of the salts and form a biphasic mixture from which the organic layer can be separated and dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and distilled at 5 Torr and 41 °C -43°C to afford a clear liquid (361 g, 84.2%). Residual ether can be boiled
  • the flask can be allowed to slowly warm to room temperature.
  • a white powdery suspension can form during the reaction and can be removed by suction filtration to form a filter cake.
  • the filter cake can be washed with 1 00 mL of THF, and the filtrate collected and added to 3 to 5 mL of water to destroy any remaining allylmagnesium bromide.
  • the THF can be distilled off and the remaining solution can be washed with water.
  • the organic layer (90.7 grams) can be dried with MgSO 4 and distilled at 40°C -41 °C/5 Torr to isolate about 63 grams of 63.5% (area percent by gas chromatography) R F - intermediate 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl) propyl)- 6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene.
  • the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3- tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene can be modified to produce another Rp-intermediate.
  • a 100 mL pressure tube equipped with a 9 inch Pen-Ray ® Hg lamp, pressure gauge, agitator, and dip tube can be added 60 grams (0.14 moles) of 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl) propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene.
  • the tube can be sealed and gaseous anhydrous HBr can be bubbled into the system to maintain a pressure of 101.37kPa to 308.27kPa.
  • the tube can be irradiated with the Pen-Ray lamp until the pressure ceases to decrease.
  • the mixture can then be washed once with water and once with 10% aqueous sodium bicarbonate.
  • the organic layer can assay as high as 92.7% (area percent by gas chromatography) and can be dried with MgSO 4 and distilled at 73 ° C-74°C/3.1 Torr.
  • R F -intermediate 8,9,9,9-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)propyl)- ⁇ -(trifluoromethyl) non-1 -ene can be assayed by mass spectrometry (m/z 462 (M + ) , 420.1 (M + - 42), 279.1 (M + - 183)).
  • R F -intermediates including the telomers described above, such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,9,9,9-hexadecafluoro-8-iodononane, can be modified according to scheme (27) below.
  • R F -surfactant compositions that include the R F portions described above.
  • R F -surfactant compositions can be referred to as R F -Q S .
  • R F can have a greater affinity for a first part of the system than Q s
  • Q s can have a greater affinity for a second part of the system than R F .
  • the system can include liquid/liquid systems, liquid/gas systems, liquid/solid systems, and/or gas/solid systems.
  • Liquid/liquid systems for example, can include systems having at least one part that includes water and another liquid part that is hydrophobic relative to the part that includes water.
  • Liquid/liquid systems can also include systems of which water is not a part of the system, such as hydrocarbon liquid systems.
  • R F can be hydrophobic relative to Q s and/or Q s can be hydrophilic relative to R F .
  • R F can be hydrophobic and Q s can be hydrophilic, for example.
  • the hydrophobic portion can be referred to as the tail of the R F -surfactant ? and the hydrophilic portion can be referred to as the head of the R F -surfactant.
  • the R F -surfactants can include those surfactants having a tail or hydrophobic portion containing fluorine.
  • the R F -surfactant tail or hydrophobic portion can be referred to as an R F portion, and the R F -surfactant head or hydrophilic portion can be referred to as a Q s portion.
  • Exemplary R F -surfactants include those in Table 4 below.
  • R F -surfactants can also include
  • Exemplary R F -surfactant production processes include providing an R F -intermediate such as the R F -intermediates described above having at least two -CF 3 groups.
  • Exemplary R F -intermediates can include R F -Q g with Q g being designated for later attachment to the Q s portion of R F -surfactants, for example.
  • Exemplary methods for preparing surfactants can be found in German Offen. 1 ,924,264 and U.S. Patent 3,721 ,706 both of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Exemplary methods for preparing R F -surfactants are described below. . Referring to Fig.
  • a system 70 can be configured to perform a process that includes reacting an R F -intermediate to form a Rp-surfactant, with the R F -intermediate including at least one fluorine atom, for example.
  • System 70 can include reactors 71 and 75.
  • Reactor 71 can be configured to expose an R F -intermediate 72 to a radical reagent 73.
  • R F -intermediate 72 can include an R F portion, such as those described above.
  • Reagent 73 can include HSCH 2 CO 2 H, for example.
  • Rp-intermediate 72 can be exposed to reagent 73 in the presence of a radical initiator, such as AIBN to produce a R F -intermediate 74 such as R F -C 3 H 6 -S-CH 2 CO 2 H, for example.
  • reactor 75 can be configured to combine R F -intermediate 74 and reagent 76 to produce a R F -surfactant 77.
  • Reagent 76 can include HO(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -CH 3 and R F -surfactant 77 can include R F -C 3 H 6 -S-CH 2 C(O)(CH 2 CH 2 ) n CH 3 , with n being at least 1 , for example.
  • reagent 73 can include radical initiators and/or ethylene
  • R F -intermediate 74 such as R F -CH 2 CH 2 I + N(CH 3 ) 3
  • Reactor 72 can be configured to expose R F -intermediate 74 to reagent 76 to form Rp-surfactant 67.
  • Reagent 76 can include pyridine, for example.
  • R F -surfactant 77 can include R F -surfactants such as R F -Q S , with Q s including a quaternary ammonium ion such as -CH 2 CH 2 N + (CH 3 ) 3 r, for example.
  • RF-intermediates can be converted to thiocyanate R F -intermediates such as RF-SCN, by reacting heterohalogenated R F -intermediates such as iodine R F -intermediates, for example, with potassium thiocyanate.
  • the reaction can be carried out in absolute ethanol using acetic acid as a catalyst.
  • a 30% molar excess of KSCN as compared to the R F -intermediate can be used.
  • the ethanol, acetic acid, Rp-intermediate, and KSCN can be charged to a reaction vessel, heated to reflux, and held there until the reaction is complete.
  • the reaction progress can be monitored by analyzing the reaction mixture for R F -intermediate by gas chromatography.
  • the Kl formed can be filtered off the reaction mixture, the ethanol can be evaporated away, and the thiocyanate R F -intermediate can be washed twice with hot (70°C) water.
  • Reagent 73 can include a mixture of the KSCN, ethanol and acetic acid described above.
  • the R F -intermediate can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 83°C and/or reflux temperature to produce an intermediate 74 such as R F -SCN.
  • R F -intermediate 74 can then be exposed to reagent 76 to form intermediate 77.
  • R F -intermediate 74, such as R F -SCN can be wet chlorinated to give the sulfonylchloride of the R F -intermediate as shown below in exemplary reaction sequence (28).
  • the R F -SCN, water, and acetic acid as a solvent can be charged to reactor 75.
  • Chlorine can be added to the reaction vessel in 30 minute increments while the temperature of the mixture within reactor 75 is maintained at 20°C to 30°C.
  • 0.314 grams of water can be added to reactor 75.
  • 4.5 moles per mole of R F -SCN can be added.
  • the mixture within reactor 75 can be sampled and analyzed for R F -SCN by gas chromatography.
  • the mixture within reactor 75 can be diluted to 65% (wt/wt) R F -SO 2 CI with chloroform, heated to about 40°C and washed with twice its volume of 40°C water. After the wash, the washed mixture can be dried by azeotropic distillation of the water using a Dean Stark trap. Karl Fischer titration can be used to determine water amount. Water content can be less than 0.1 %- As described above, reagent 76 can include a mixture of Cl 2 , H 2 O, and acetic acid.
  • R F -intermediate 74 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 30°C to 40°C to produce Rp-intermediate 67, such as R F -SO 2 CI.
  • a system 80 configured to produce R F -surfactants from R F -intermediates, for example, those produced in system 70, such as R F -intermediate 77, is shown.
  • System 80 can include reactors 81 and 82.
  • Reactor 81 can be configured to expose an R F -intermediate 83, such as R F -intermediate 77 described above, to reagent 84.
  • R F -intermediate 83 can have the general formula R F -SO 2 CI described above, for example.
  • exposing R F -intermediate 83 to reagent 84 esterifies intermediate 83 to form R F -intermediate 85, which can include a sulfonamidoamine.
  • Dimethylaminopropylamine H 2 N(CH 2 ) 3 N(CH 3 ) 2 , DMAPA
  • DMAPA Dimethylaminopropylamine
  • the solvent and reactants can be as dry as having at least less than 0.1 % by weight water.
  • the DMAPA can be dissolved in 1 .5 times its volume in chloroform in reactor 81 which can be immersed in a cooling bath.
  • a DMAPA molar equivalent of 65% (wt/wt) R F -SO 2 CI in chloroform solution can be added to reactor 81 while maintaining the temperature of the contents of reactor 81 at less than 50°C. When the addition is complete, the temperature of the contents can be raised to reflux and held at reflux for 5 hours. Reactor 81 contents can then be cooled to 60°C and washed 3 times with equal volumes of 60°C water.
  • reagent 84 can include a mixture of DMAPA and CHCI 3 . Intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from between about 30°C-65°C to produce R F -intermediate 85, such as for example. As another example, reagent 84 can include a mixture of 2-aminoacetic acid and CHCI 3 and intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from between about 30°C-65°C to produce R F -intermediate 85, such as
  • Reagent 84 can also include a mixture of 2-(methylamino)acetic acid and CHCI 3 and intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from
  • Intermediate 85 can then be betainized, for example, with an acetate reagent such as sodium monochloroacetate within reactor 82 to yield
  • R F -surfactant 87 such as the amphoteric R F -surfactant R F -SO 2 NH(CH 2 ) 3 N + (CH 3 ) 2 (CH 2 CO 2 Na) as shown as exemplary reaction sequence (30) and described below.
  • the sulfonamide can be dissolved in enough absolute ethanol to give a 40% (wt/wt) solution.
  • An equimolar amount of sodium monochloroacetate can be added to reactor 82 containing the 40% (wt/wt) solution to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can then be refluxed for 8 hours and then sampled and titrated for free OH ⁇ If OH " is greater than 1 .5 x 1 0 "3 eq., the mixture is refluxed for an additional hour and reanalyzed. This sequence can be repeated until free OH " is less than 1 .5 x 10 "3 eq.
  • Reactor 82 can be configured to expose intermediate 85, such as
  • reagent 86 can include a mixture of and ethanol. Intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture while the mixture is refluxing to produce R F -
  • surfactant 87 such as , for example.
  • reagent 86 can include a mixture of 50% (wt/wt) H 2 O 2 /H 2 O and intermediate 83,
  • R F -surfactant 87 such as for example, can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 35°C to produce R F -surfactant 87, such as
  • Reagent 86 can also include
  • Rp-surfactant 87 such as
  • reagent 86 can include
  • reagent 86 can include bromomethane and intermediate 85, such as can be exposed
  • R F -surfactant 87 can also include chloromethane and intermediate 85, such as
  • R F -surfactant 87 such as R F -surfactant 87, such as
  • reagent 86 can also include a basic solution such as NaOH and intermediate 85, such as
  • R F -surfactant 87 such as
  • Systems 70 and 80 may be combined in sequence and R F -surfactants produced according to schemes (31 ) - (45) below. Where LC/MS can be used to identify compounds, Table 5 of LC/MS parameters, below, can be used.
  • a mixture of 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoro-4-iodo-2- trifluoromethyl-butane (100 grams) and potassium thiocyanate (39 grams) can be dissolved in 55 mL of ethanol and 1 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux, where it can be allowed to reflux for a couple of days.
  • the mixture can be cooled to room temperature and concentrated to dryness under vacuum.
  • Deionized water (100mL) can be added to the dry solids and the resulting oil can be decanted and identified to be 1,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-4- thiocyanate-2-trifluoromethyl-butane (69.9 grams, 88.4%) by NMR analysis.
  • a mixture of the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-4-thiocyanate-2-trifluoromethyl-butane (25.5 grams) in 25 mL of acetic acid containing 2 mL of water can be sparged with chlorine gas at 40°C for a couple of days with intermittent heating of the mixture to form a heterogeneous mixture.
  • the mixture can be cooled to room temperature and diluted with chloroform (50mL).
  • the organic portion can be washed twice with water, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum.
  • the resulting yellow oil can contain large amounts of residual acetic acid by NMR analysis.
  • the yellow oil can be dissolved in chloroform and washed twice with water (25mL/each), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum and identified to be 4,4,4,3-tetrafluoro-4- trifluoromethyl-butanesulfonyl chloride (23.8 grams, 80%) by NMR analysis.
  • the 4,4,4,3-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-butanesulfonyl chloride (23.8 grams) can be dissolved in 50 mL of ether and added drop-wise to a solution of dimethylaminopropylamine (8.2g) and 11 .2 mL of triethylamine (TEA) at ambient over 20 minutes to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be partitioned between ethyl acetate (100mL) and water (150mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated and washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (50mL) and brine (50mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow semi solid.
  • NMR and LC/MS analysis can indicate the yellow semi solid can be a mixture of the mono and bis sulfonated material.
  • the semi solid can be triturated in hexanes, and the filtered solid identified as 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3- trifluoromethyl-butane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino -propyl)-amide (9.9 grams) by NMR analysis.
  • the 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-butane-1-sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (10 grams) can be dissolved in 50 mL of ethanol containing 3.2 grams of sodium chloroacetate to form a mixture and can be refluxed overnight. The mixture can be filtered, concentrated under vacuum, and distilled twice using chloroform to afford by NMR analysis. The product can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 60°C and 0.1 Torr to afford a pale yellow foam like solid (10 grams, 84%).
  • Benzyl bromide (2.36 grams) can be added to the flask to form a mixture and the mixture heated to reflux (56°C) and agitated for 2 hours. A white precipitate can form when the temperature of the mixture reached 56°C. The mixture can become too thick to stir after 2 hours. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and the solids collected by filtration and dried in a vacuum oven at 45°C
  • RF-surfactants can also be prepared in accordance with scheme 37 below.
  • the mixture can be stirred for 1 hour at ⁇ 5°C.
  • the mixture can be filtered and the solids washed three times with 25 mL of methylene chloride.
  • the solids can be identified by NMR to be 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-1-butane- sulfonylamino)-acetic acid benzyl ester.
  • the 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-1 -butane sulfonylamino)-acetic acid benzyl ester (1.0 grams) can be dissolved in 10 mL of ethanol in a 250 mL Parr bottle.
  • the bottle can be placed on a Parr shaker at 418 kPaand shaken overnight.
  • the mixture can be sparged with nitrogen and filtered through a thin pad of Celite.
  • the Celite can be rinsed three times with 20 mL of ethanol, and 1.18 mL of an aqueous 2N sodium hydroxide solution added to the combined filtrate and stirred.
  • the filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum and dried to afford 0.803 grams (95.7%) of a
  • Sarcosine ethyl ester hydrochloride (7.68 grams) can be partitioned between 100 mL of methylene chloride and 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The layers can be separated and the bottom organic layer washed with 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The organic layer can be dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford 5.45 grams (93.0%) of a colorless oil that can be identified as sarcosine ethyl ester by NMR.
  • the mixture can be stirred for 3 hours. ⁇ 5°C, and washed two times with 20 mL of 5% (wt/wt) aqueous HCl solution and once with brine.
  • the organic layer can be recovered, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 7.78 grams of a light yellow oil that can be placed on a Kugelrohr and heated to 50°C, 0.01 Torr to remove the low boiling impurities and identified as [Methyl-(3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl- butane-1 -sulfonyl)-amino]-acetic ethyl ester (>96%) by NMR.
  • acetic acid (828.3 grams) can be dissolved in acetic acid (828mL) to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be treated with 33mL deionized water and sparged with chlorine and heated to 40 ° C overnight with additional treatments of water.
  • the temperature of the mixture can be increased to 50°C and can be continued to be heated with a chlorine sparge for additional days to achieve approximately 80% completion.
  • the mixture can be cooled to room temperature and quenched using methylene chloride (2L) and deionized water (2L).
  • the organic layer can be washed three times with deionized water (1 L each). The organic layer can be then dried over magnesium sulfate overnight.
  • the dried organic layer can be filtered and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil (862.4 grams), and the oil can be dissolved in acetic acid (850mL) to form a mixture.
  • This mixture can be heated to 50°C with a chlorine sparge, and deionized water (33mL) can be added once the reaction reaches 50 ° C.
  • the mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature and quenched using methylene chloride (2L) and deionized water (1 L).
  • the organic layer can be washed three times with deionized water (1 L each) and then dried over magnesium sulfate overnight.
  • the dried organic layer can be filtered and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil (859.6 grams, 95.4%) NMR and gas chromatography analysis can indicate
  • the mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight.
  • the reaction can be tested for peroxide using Kl starch test strips, and if positive, the mixture can be heated to 50 ° C for 1.5 hours or until negative.
  • the mixture can then be filtered through celite and the celite pad washed using 1 L ethanol. The filtrate can be concentrated to a white solid and the white solid placed on the Kugelrohr for 30 minutes at 0.1 Torr and 50 ° C.
  • the white solid can then be dried under vacuum at 50 ° C for four hours to afford 593.8 grams (96.6%) of 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6-trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonyl amine by NMR and/or LC/MS.
  • the 6,7,7,7-Tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6- trifluoromethyl-heptane-1-sulfonyl amine (319 grams), ethanol (1290 mL), and sodium chloroacetate (63.5 grams) can be combined to form a mixture and the mixture brought to reflux for 48 hours. After 48 hours, NMR analysis can indicate that no starting material is present, however, LC/MS analysis may indicate product ions.
  • the mixture can be filtered and the filter cake washed with ethanol (1 L).
  • the filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum to an orange foam and the orange foam placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 50°C for one hour.
  • the orange foam like solid can be dried overnight under vacuum at 50 ° C to afford
  • the diluted mixture can be washed with deionized water (250mL), 5% (wt/wt) HCl (250 L), and saturated bicarbonate solution (250mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6- trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (2-hydroxy-ethyl)-amide (5.0 grams) with residual dichloromethane and ethanolamine by NMR analysis.
  • 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl- pentane 25 grams can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol and 0.2 mL of acetic acid, and 10.9 grams of potassium thiocyanate can be added to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be heated to reflux and cooled to room temperature after about 1 to 2.5 hours, and concentrated under vacuum.
  • the concentrate can be partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and water (50mL).
  • the aqueous phase can be extracted with methylene chloride (50mL), the organic layers combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro- 5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane (21.7 grams, 93.9%) by NMR analysis.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane can be dissolved in 1 0 mL of acetic acid and 0.4 mL of water, heated to 40°C and sparged with chlorine.
  • the mixture can be washed successively with saturated bicarbonate solution (80 mL), water (80 mL), and brine (80mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 8 grams (93%) of 4,5, 5,5-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide by NMR and LC/MS analysis.
  • the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (8 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 3 mL of water and 5.1 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and the resulting solution heated at 35°C for 30 minutes.
  • the reaction can then be allowed to cool to room temperature overnight.
  • a decolorizing carbon (10 grams) and ethanol (20mL) can be added and the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours.
  • the mixture can be filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/ 10% (wt/wt) water (60 mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum, distilled with methanol, and Kugelrohr
  • 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl- pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.0 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.9 grams of sodium chloroacetate.
  • the resulting solution can be heated to reflux and allowed to reflux for two consecutive nights. After refluxing for approximately 45 hours, the reaction can be stopped, filtered, the salts rinsed and discarded and the filtrate stripped of solvent and identified as
  • the organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 18.2 grams (97%) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-8- thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-octane by NMR analysis.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-8-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-octane (18.2 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of acetic acid to form a mixture and the mixture heated to 40°C with chlorine sparging. Initially, 0.8 mL of water can be added to the mixture.
  • the 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octanesulfonyl chloride (19.5 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and added to 20.9 mL of dimethylaminopropylamine in 100 mL of chloroform at 0 °C-5°C over 1 hour to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and can be stirred at ambient for one hour.
  • the mixture can be washed twice with saturated bicarbonate solution (l OOmL/each), deionized water (200mL), and brine (200mL).
  • the organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be identified as 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino -propyl)-amide (24.09 grams, 95.97%) by NMR.
  • the 7,8, 8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino- propyl)-amide (7 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 2.3 mL of water and 4.0 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and the resulting solution can be heated at 35°C overnight.
  • Decolorizing carbon (8 grams) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the solution and the solution heated to 50°C for three hours.
  • the solution can then be cooled to room temperature, filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/deionized water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to a wax like solid.
  • the solid can be distilled twice with ethanol to afford a yellow oil that can be placed on a Kugelrohr for two hours at 40°C and 0.1 Torr to afford a white solid (5.9 grams, 79.9%) of
  • the yellow oil can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-(3-thiocyanato-propoxy)-propane by NMR.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3, 3-hexafluoro-2-(3-thiocyanato-propoxy)-propane (16.9 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL of acetic acid and 0.8 mL of water to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be heated to 40°C and sparged with chlorine.
  • the mixture can then be treated three times with deionized water (0.8mL) every two hours, and the mixture heated to 40°C under a chlorine sparge for about 48 hours.
  • the mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature, partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer separated and washed three times with deionized water (100mL/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonyl chloride (1 8.4 grams, 99.3%) by NMR.
  • the 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonyl chloride (18.4 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and added to 22.5 mL of dimethylaminopropylamine in 1 00 mL of chloroform at 0 °C-5°C over 1 hour to form a mixture. When the addition is complete the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and stir at ambient for 1 hour. The mixture can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (200 mL), deionzied water (200mL), and brine (200mL).
  • the organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be placed on the Kugelrohr for 15 minutes at ambient temperature and 0.1 Torr to afford 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 - trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (20.88g (92.8%)) by NMR.
  • the 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 2.6 mL of water and 4.4 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide to form a mixture and the mixture heated at 35°C overnight.
  • Decolorizing carbon (8 grams) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the mixture, the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours, filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/water (50mL) and the filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum to afford a white semi-solid.
  • the solid can be refluxed twice in ethanol prior to being placed on the Kugelrohr for 1 hour at 40°C and 0.1 Torr to afford
  • 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)- propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.0 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.9 grams of sodium chloroacetate. The resulting solution can be refluxed and stirred for 40 hours, the reaction quenched, and filtered. The solvent can be stripped and the resulting solid placed in a drying oven (50 °C, 1 Torr) overnight to
  • NMR analysis can indicate 3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (18.52 grams, 70.1%).
  • the 3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (18.5 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and cooled to 0 °C-5°C, then 20 mL of 3-dimethylaminopropylamine can be added in 100 mL of chloroform drop-wise over 1 hour.
  • the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and stir at ambient temperature for 3 hours.
  • the reaction can then be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (200mL), deionized water (200mL), and brine (200mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow solid (20.0 grams).
  • NMR analysis can indicate the yellow oil is 1 :1 mono and bis sulfonyl amine products.
  • the mono and bis sulfonyl amine starting material (10 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL ethanol, deionized water (3.7 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (4.7 mL).
  • the heterogeneous mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature over 2 days and decolorizing carbon (7 grams) and ethanol (15mL) added to the mixture.
  • the mixture can be stirred over 2 days at room temperature, monitored for peroxide, the bulk reaction filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow solid (7.07 grams).
  • the yellow solid can be identified as 1 :1 mono/bis product by NMR and/or LC/MS analysis.
  • a solution of 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzyl bromide (25 grams) and 11.9 grams of potassium thiocyanate can be suspended in 40 mL of ethanol and 0.2 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux, refluxed for 3 hours, allowed to cool to room temperature, and then concentrated under vacuum to afford a white solid.
  • the white solid can be partitioned between ether (100mL) and deionized water (100mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl- pentane (22.58 grams, 96.6%), that can be identified by NMR.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane (22.5 grams) can be dissolved in 32 mL acetic acid and heated to 50°C with chlorine sparging overnight.
  • the reaction mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature, partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer washed thrice with deionized water (100mL/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to yield a white solid of 3,5-bis-trifluoromehtyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (22.94 grams, 89.1%) that can be determined by NMR.
  • the 3,5-bis-trifluoromehtyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (5 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of chloroform and added to a cooled (0 °C-5°C) solution of 4.4 mL of 3- dimethylaminopropylamine in 25 mL of chloroform drop-wise over 1 hour, then allowed to warm to room temperature after the addition is complete.
  • the homogeneous solution can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (50mL), deionized water (50mL), and brine (50mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow solid (5.26 grams, 87.7%), that can be determined by NMR analysis to be 90% C-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide with the impurity being the bis addition compound.
  • the C-(3,5-Bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide (6 grams) can be dissolved in 20 mL ethanol, deionized water (2.2 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (3.6 mL), and the heterogeneous mixture allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. The mixture can then be cooled, decolorizing carbon (5 grams) and ethanol (15mL) added, heated to 50°C for 2 hours, monitored for peroxide, cooled to room temperature, and filtered through celite.
  • the filter cake can be washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, 10% (wt/wt) water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford C-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide by NMR analysis.
  • the R F -intermediate can be then placed in THF (70 mL) and added drop-wise to the mixture. The mixture can be allowed to stir at 0°C for 30 minutes, then allowed to warm to room temperature and stir for an hour.
  • the biphasic solution can be separated, the aqueous layer set aside, the organic layer dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and stripped of solvent.
  • the resulting yellow oil can be placed on the Kugelrohr (40°C, 0.1 Torr, 15 minutes) to remove residual solvent.
  • the R F -intermediate can be combined with thiourea (0.68 grams) in ethanol (25 mL) and heated to reflux overnight. After 22 hours of refluxing, the reaction system can be dismantled, the ethanol stripped, and the remaining oil placed on the Kugelrohr (0.01 mmHg, 20 min, 60°C) which can yield 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane- -thiol (3.4 grams) that can be determined by NMR and/or LC/MS analysis.
  • the 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -thiol can be placed in a flask and cooled to 0°C and NaH (0.08 grams) added to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be cooled to -78°C, flushed with nitrogen, condensed in ethylene oxide (1.6 grams), and allowed to warm to room temperature, then placed in a 65°C oil bath overnight.
  • Ethyl acetate (20 mL) and HCl (1 N, 10 mL) can be added to the mixture, the layers separated, the aqueous layer extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL, 5 times). All organic layers can be combined, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, stripped of solvent and the resulting brown oil (2.2 grams) characterized LC/MS analysis.
  • potassium thiocyanate (8.7 grams), ethanol (40mL), and acetic acid (0.2mL) can be combined and brought to reflux, refluxed for 3 hours, and the heterogeneous mixture allowed to cool to room temperature and concentrated under vacuum to yield a white/yellow semi-solid.
  • the semi-solid can be partitioned between ether (100mL) and deionized water (100mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil (21.19 grams, 97.2%) that can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-7-thiocyanato-2,4- bistrifluoromethyl-heptane (>95% pure) by NMR and gas chromatography analysis.
  • the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-7-thiocyanato-2,4-bistrifluoromethyl-heptane can be dissolved in 30 mL acetic acid and heated to 40°C with chlorine sparging overnight. The temperature of the mixture can be increased to 50 °C for 6 hours and allowed to cool to room temperature.
  • the mixture can be partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer can be separated, washed thrice with deionized water (100ml_/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil.
  • the oil can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 40°C for 30 minutes to afford a yellow oil (13.4 grams, 57.3%) that can be identified by NMR and gas chromatography analysis to be indicated >94% 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptanesulfonyl chloride.
  • Dimethylaminopropyl amine (11.6mL) can be dissolved in chloroform (75mL) and cooled to 0°C.
  • the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl-heptanesulfonyl chloride (13.4 grams) can be dissolved in chloroform (75mL) and added drop-wise to the cooled solution to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature, and can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (150mL), deionized water (150mL), and brine (150mL).
  • the organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil (14.94 grams, 96.0%). The orange oil can be found to be
  • the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7.5 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL ethanol, deionized water (30 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (3.7 mL).
  • the homogeneous mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight.
  • Decolorizing carbon (5g) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the mixture and the mixture heated to 50°C for 2.5 hrs while monitoring for peroxide.
  • the reaction mixture can then be cooled to room temperature and filtered through celite.
  • the filter cake can be washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, 10% (wt/wt) water (50mL), the filtrate concentrated under vacuum and the resulting
  • the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7.5 grams) can be dissolved in ethanol (40mL), and sodium chloroacetate (1.85 grams) to form a mixture. The mixture can be refluxed overnight. The heterogeneous mixture can be cooled to room temperature and filtered, the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil. The orange oil can be dried on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 50°C for one hour to afford an amber solid (7.85 grams, 93.1 %). The amber solid can identified as
  • a mercaptan R F -intermediate may also be produced by reacting a iodine R F -intermediate with thiourea to make the isothiuronium salt and treating the isothiuronium salt with sodium hydroxide to give the mercaptan R F -intermediate plus sodium iodide, as described in U.S. patent 3,544,663 herein incorporated by reference.
  • the mercaptan R F -intermediate may also be produced by reacting a iodine R F -intermediate with thiourea to make the isothiuronium salt and treating the isothiuronium salt with sodium hydroxide to give the mercaptan R F -intermediate plus sodium iodide, as described in U.S. patent 3,544,663 herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -intermediate may be attached to a Q s portion such as group 2-acrylamido-2-methyl-1 propane sulfonic acid available from Lubrizol as AMPS 2403, as generally described in U.S. patent 4,000,1 88 herein incorporated by reference.
  • Aminoxides of the R F -surfactants can be produced according to processes that include those generally described in U.S. patent 4,983,769, herein incorporated by reference. Accordingly, sulfoamidoamines can be combined with ethanol and water and 70% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and heated to at least 35 ° C for 24 hours. Activated carbon can then be added and the mixture and refluxed for about 2 hours.
  • the reaction mixture can be filtered and the filtrate evaporated to dryness to provide the aminoxide of the R F -surfactant.
  • processes are provided that can be used to alter the surface tension of a part of a system having at least two parts.
  • the system can include liquid/solid systems, liquid/gas systems, gas/solid systems, and/or liquid/liquid systems.
  • the liquid/liquid systems can have one part that includes water and another part that includes a liquid that is relatively hydrophobic when compared to water.
  • the liquid/liquid system can contain one part that is relatively hydrophobic when compared to water and/or relatively hydrophobic when compared to another part of the system.
  • R F -surfactants can be used to alter the surface tension of a part of the system, for example, by adding the
  • R F -surfactant to the system.
  • Rp-surfactants may be used as relatively pure solutions or as mixtures with other components.
  • the Rp- surfactants can be added to a system and the surface tension of the system determined by the Wilhelmy plate method and/or using the Kruss Tensiometer method.
  • the surface tensions of at various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #6 below.
  • the surface tensions of at pH 6.2-6.8-*- and pH 5.0 -*- can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #8 below.
  • R F -surfactants described above may be incorporated into detergents, emulsifiers, paints, adhesives, inks, wetting agents, foamers, and/or defoamers, for example.
  • R F -surfactants can be incorporated into AFFF formulations and these formulations can be used as fire-fighting foams, to prevent, and/or extinguish combustion.
  • R F -surfactant includes the addition of the AFFF to high pressure misting systems, the misting systems being used to prevent and/or extinguish combustion.
  • AFFF formulations can be provided to a substrate, for example.
  • the substrate can include liquid and/or solid compositions.
  • the AFFF formulations can also be dispersed into an atmosphere including gaseous atmospheres, such air to prevent and/or extinguish combustion.
  • the formulations can include other components such as water soluble solvents. These solvents may facilitate the solubilization of the R F -surfactants and other surfactants. These solvents can also act as foam stabilizers and/or freeze protection agents.
  • Exemplary solvents include ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, glycerol, ethyl Cellusolve ® , butyl Carbitol ® , Dowanol DPM ® , Dowanol TPM ® , Dowanol PTB ® , propylene glycol, and/or hexylene glycol.
  • Additional components to the formulation such as polymeric stabilizers and thickeners, can be incorporated into the formulation to enhance the foam stability property of a foam produced from aeration of the aqueous solution of the formulation.
  • Exemplary polymeric stabilizers and thickeners include partially hydrolyzed protein, starches, polyvinyl resins such as polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylamides, carboxyvinyl polymers, and/or poly(oxyethylene)glycol.
  • Polysaccharide resins such as xanthan gum, can be included in the formulation as a foam stabilizer in formulations for use in preventing or extinguishing polar solvent combustion, such as alcohol, ketone, and/or ether combustion, for example.
  • the formulation can also include a buffer to regulate the pH of the formulation, for example, tris(2-hydroxyethyl) amine or sodium acetate, and a corrosion inhibitor such as toluoltriazole or sodium nitrite may be included.
  • Water soluble electrolytes such as magnesium sulphate may be included and can improve film-spreading characteristics of the formulation.
  • the following formulations can be prepared using R F -surfactants. Formulations recited in the following tables can be prepared and applied to the indicated substrates.
  • a 3% (wt/wt) premixed solution of formulation #1 in water from Table 7 above can be used to film on the substrate heptane.
  • a 3% (wt/wt) premixed solution of formulation #2 in water from Table 8 above can be used to film on the substrate heptane.
  • Formulations 5 and 6 of Table 10 above can be used at 3% (wt/wt) concentrations to generate foam and film over the substrate heptane.
  • the R F - surfactants can also be useful in formulations that include other surfactants such as alkyl sulfate, alkylethersulfates, alphaolefinsulfonates, alkyl sulfobetaines, alkyl polyglycerides, alkylamidopropylbetaines, alkylimidazolinedicarboxylat.es, 2-alkylthiopropionamido-2 methyl- propanesulfonoic acid sodium salt, alkyliminodipropinates, alkylsulfonates, ethoxylated alkylphenols, dialkylsulfosuccinates, and/or alkyltrimethyl ammonium chloride.
  • Film Forming Foam(s) can be used to extinguish hydrocarbon fires in much the same manner that AFFF foams are used and may also be used to extinguish fires involving water soluble solvents such as acetone and isopropanol which conventional AFFF foams will not extinguish.
  • ARAFFF formulations can contain the same ingredients as conventional AFFF formulations plus a polysaccharide such as xanthan gum and, in some formulations, a polymeric foam stabilizer. Polymeric foam stabilizers are offered by DuPont ® and Dynax ® , Inc. An exemplary DuPont product, Forafac ® 1268, is a water soluble acrylic polymer.
  • An exemplary Dynax product, DX5011 ® is an ethyleneimine polymer.
  • Xanthan gum is offered by several suppliers, including Kelco CP (Kelzan) and Rhodia North America (Rhodopol).
  • Polysaccharide alone can be sufficient to make ARAFFF formulations alcohol resistant, but the amount required produces a foam concentrate that can be quite viscous.
  • the use of a polymeric foam stabilizer can permit a reduction in the amount of polysaccharide required to give useful alcohol resistance.
  • ARAFFF concentrates can contain an effective amount of a biocide such as Kathon CG ICP, manufactured by Rohm & Haas.
  • ARAFFF formulations can be designed to be proportioned at different percentages depending on whether the substrate to be extinguished is a hydrocarbon or an alcohol type substrate, for example. Alcohol type can include any fuel having a hydroxyl group.
  • Exemplary ARAFFF formulations (3% (wt/wt) x 3% (wt/wt)) utilizing the R F surfactants are described in Tables 11 -14 as follows. In all cases described in Tables 11 -14, water is balance of formulation.
  • Foam stabilizers such as Rp-stabilizers that include R F groups described above, for example, can be prepared.
  • Rp-stabilizers can include R F - Q FS compositions.
  • Q FS can include portions that have a greater hydrophilic character than R F .
  • Exemplary R F -Foam Stabilizers include, but are not limited to those in Table 15 below.
  • R F stabilizers can be prepared according to scheme (59) below. llltkni ⁇ rih itp ⁇ la ⁇ i
  • potassium carbonate (2.37 grams), methioglycolate (1 .82 grams) and dimethylformamide (DMF) (20mL) can be added and the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours.
  • the mixture can be allowed to stir overnight at room temperature to form a yellow slurry which can be added to water (50mL) and ethyl acetate (50mL), the organic layers combined, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and stripped of solvent.
  • thioester 4.0 grams
  • Sodium methoxide (0.15 grams) and sodium borohydride (0.04 grams) can be added to the mixture and the mixture heated to 115°C for 15 hours, then stirred at room temperature for 2 days. Removal of remaining isopropanal can be difficult.
  • a solution of sodium chloroacetate (10.52 grams) in water (25mL) can be added drop-wise to the mixture and the temperature kept below 55°C and the mixture then heated to 70°C for two hours.
  • NaOH (1.23 grams of a 50% (wt/wt) solution of NaOH and water) can be added to raise the pH of the mixture to at least 7.5 from the starting pH of approximately 6. The mixture can then be allowed to continue stirring at 70°C for 2 additional hours, the heat then removed,
  • R F -metal complexes such as R F -Q c incorporating the R F portions are also provided.
  • the R F portions can be incorporated as acid halides or carboxylic acids, for example, with the acid halide including, but not limited to, acid fluorides, for example.
  • R F -metal complexes can include R F -intermediates and, as such, Q g can be interchangeable with Q MC - QM C can include the portion of a ligand of a metal complex that is coordinated with the complexed metal, for example.
  • Exemplary R F -metal complexes include, but are not limited to, those in Table 20 below.
  • An exemplary method for preparing the R F -metal complexes includes reacting the R F -intermediate having halogen functionality, such as Q g is I, disclosed above, with fuming sulfuric acid to produce an R F -intermediate having acid fluoride functionality, for example.
  • R F -metal complexes can be prepared with reference to scheme (60) below.
  • An acid fluoride R F -intermediate can be reacted with an amino acid such as glycine to produce an amine ester.
  • the amine ester may then be reacted with chromic chloride in an alcohol such as methanol or isopropanol to produce an exemplary R F -metal complex such as a R F chrome complex.
  • Exemplary acid R F -intermediates for use in preparation of R F .metal complexes can include ethylene carboxylic acid R F -intermediates and/or mixtures of ethylene carboxylic acid R F -intermediates and carboxylic acid R F -intermediates. Exemplary preparations can be performed in accordance with U.S.
  • R F -metal complexes can include a ligand having a R F portion and a Q MC portion associated with the metal of the complex.
  • the Q M c portion can have a greater affinity for the metal of the complex than the R F portion.
  • R F -metal complexes can be used to treat substrates such as paper, leather, textiles, yarns, fabrics, glass, ceramic products, and/or metals. In some cases treating substrates with the complexes render the substrates less permeable to water and/or oil.
  • An embodiment of the present invention also provides for incorporation of the R F portions into phosphate esters which, in exemplary embodiments, can be used to treat substrates and/or be used as dispersing agents during the preparation of polymers.
  • exemplary R F -phosphate esters include R F -Q PE , with the Q PE portion being the phosphate portion of the Rp-composition.
  • R F -phosphate esters include, but are not limited to, those in Table 21 below.
  • R F -phosphate esters can be prepared with reference to schemes (61 ) and (62) below.
  • the iodine R F -intermediate can be reacted with P 2 O 5 or POCI 3 in the presence of a metal (M) to yield an exemplary R F - phosphate ester or R F -pyrophosphate in accordance with U.S.
  • Patents 2,559,749 and 2,597,702 herein incorporated by reference, which generally describe the conversion of hydroxyl compounds to phosphate esters using P 2 O 5 or POCI 3 to give partial esters. These reactions can also be carried out in the presence of pyridine as an HCl acceptor. Monoalkyl phosphates can also be prepared by treating phosphorus pentoxide P 2 O 5 with excess moles of hydroxyl R F -intermediate followed by hydrolysis of the resulting
  • R F -pyrophosphate The product can then be isolated or precipitated as the ammonium salt by the addition of ammonia to the reaction mixture.
  • a solution of salts of the mixed mono- and di-esters can be prepared by neutralizing a mixture of the acids with aqueous ammonia and amine or alkaline metal hydroxide.
  • R F -dialkyl phosphates can also be prepared as well by a reaction of excess moles of R F -intermediate with phosphorus pentoxide (not shown). Instead of hydrolysis, however the R F -pyrophosphate intermediate can be heated at low pressure.
  • R F -phosphate esters can be prepared and separated by treating hydroxyl R F -intermediate with phosphorus pentoxide, neutralizing the resulting mixed acid phosphate with aqueous ammonia, and amine such as tetraalkyl ammonium base or alkali metal hydroxide to give a solution that can include amine or metal salts of the esters (not shown). Salts of esters can be dissolved in toluene and purged with ammonia to precipitate a mixture of the salts of the corresponding esters.
  • the toluene and unreacted hydroxyl R F -intermediate and by-products can be removed by filtration producing compositions having the general formula R F AOPORp, as described in U.S. Patent 4,145,382, herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F is the R F portion
  • A is a methylene group or other similar spacer group from the phosphate ester and can be present in amounts as high as 3 and as little as none
  • Rp is a corresponding salt to the phosphate including hydrogen alkali metal ammonium or substituted ammonium such as ethanol amine.
  • Rp-phosphates can be used as dispersing agents in the preparation of polymers or they can be diluted and used to treat substrate materials in aqueous bathes, for example, by ordinary means such as padding, dipping, impregnating, spraying, etc.
  • These compositions can be incorporated into or used to treat such materials as textile fabric, textile yarns, leather, paper, plastic, sheeting, wood, ceramic clays, as well as, manufactured articles prepared therefrom such as articles of apparel, wallpaper, paper bags, cardboard boxes, porous earthenware, etc.
  • U.S. Patent 3,112,241 describes methods for treating materials using phosphate esters and is herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -epoxide intermediate and/or R F -diol intermediate can be prepared as generally described in U.S. Patent 3,919,361 which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -epoxide and diol intermediates can be reacted with phosphoric acid to obtain an R F -phosphoric acid ester.
  • R F -phosphoric acid ester can be dissolved in a solution and applied to a substrate such as paper to increase resistance to environmental materials such as oil and water.
  • Rp-phosphoric acid ester can also exist as a salt such as alkyl amines including ethanol amines as described in U.S. Patent 4,145,382, herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -phosphoric acid ester can be used to treat substrates such as wood pulp products, including paper products such as packaging products including food packaging products.
  • An embodiment includes the R F portions incorporated into glycols, such as R F -glycols, including R F -Q h , with Q h representing the ether portion of the glycol after conjugation or, as hydroxyl functionality before conjugation as the ether.
  • Exemplary R F -glycols include, but are not limited to, those in Table 22 below.
  • RF-glycols can be incorporated into polymers such as urethanes including polyurethane elastomers, films and coatings, for example.
  • R F -glycols can also be converted to phosphoric acids or phosphate esters of those glycols as well. Referring to scheme (63) below, R F portions can be incorporated into glycols.
  • the R F -glycol can then be used directly or indirectly to prepare a R F condensation product such as polyesters, polyureas, polycarbonates, and polyurethanes.
  • This glycol functionality can also be incorporated into block polymers using R F -glycols.
  • U.S. Patent 5,491 ,261 discloses several other glycols that can benefit from the R F portion of the present invention and is herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -glycols may also be converted to phosphoric acid functionality or phosphate esters (not shown).
  • Patent 5,091 ,550, 5,1 32,445, 4,898,981 , and 5,491 ,261 all disclose methods of preparing diols and converting diols to phosphate esters and are herein incorporated by reference.
  • the diols can be converted to phosphoric acid or phosphate esters by reacting the diols in the presence of phosphoric acid.
  • These compositions can be incorporated into compounds which can act as oil and grease proofing for paper, as well as, soil release agents for textile fibers.
  • oligomers, polymers, copolymers, acrylics, and/or resins can be prepared that include an R F -monomer unit, such as R F -Q MU .
  • the monomer unit portion, Q M U > can be a single unit within a complex of units and the monomer unit need not repeat within the complex.
  • the monomer unit can be a single unit within the complex or it may be one of many identical units linked together, such as a homopolymer, for example.
  • the complex can also include block polymers and/or polyurethane resins.
  • the R F of the unit can include a pendant group of the monomer unit.
  • the monomer unit may be associated with a complex, perhaps even bonded to the complex, for example, and Q M u can include the portion of the monomer unit that is associated with the complex.
  • the complex may be coated onto a substrate or it may be chemically bonded to the substrate.
  • a preparation of R F -intermediates can be provided to the substrate and groups such as hydroxyl groups common to substrates like cotton, may provide sites that allow the Rp-intermediate to chemically bond to the substrate when forming part of, or being associated with a complex.
  • Q M u can represent the acrylate functionality of an acrylic and R F can be a pendant group from the acrylics chain and/or backbone.
  • Exemplary RF-monomer units include but are not limited to those in Table 23 below.
  • oligomers containing a R F -monomer unit can be prepared from R F -monomers.
  • R F -monomers can include R F -intermediates above, but may contain functionality that allows for their conjugation with another monomer, but not necessarily the same R F -monomer.
  • Exemplary Rp- monomers include, but are not limited to those in Table 24 below.
  • W can be an alkylene with 1 to 15 carbons, hydroxyalkylene with 3 to 15 carbons, -(C n H 2n )(OC m H 2m ) q -, -SO 2 NR 2 -(C n H 2n )-, or -CONR 2 -(C n H 2n )-, with n is 1 to 12, m is 2 to 4, q is 1 to 10, and Ri is an alkyl group with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, for example, X can be O, S and/or N(R 2 ), where R 2 is as R ⁇
  • the R F -monomer 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluormethyl)pentyl acrylate can be prepared from the R F -intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pent-l -ene in two steps shown below as reaction schemes (65) and (66) respectively.
  • 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene (18.243, 0.087 moles) can be added to the mixture at room temperature over a 15 minute period, allowed to mix for 72 hours, and monitored by gas chromatography until which time the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene is substantially consumed (See Table 25 below for monitoring of reaction).
  • a 3M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide (7.8 grams) can be added to the mixture via an addition funnel over a 15 minute period after which the mixture can be chilled to 0°C using an ice bath.
  • Hydrogen peroxide (23.6 grams, 35% (wt/wt) aqueous solution) can be added drop-wise over a 15 minute period to the mixture and then the mixture can be washed in H 2 O (three times).
  • the organic layer can be removed and transferred into a 100mL three- neck round bottom flask and distilled to produce an 85% area percent pure (by gas chromatography 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1-ol.
  • 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentyl acrylate The 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol (2.59 grams, 0.011 moles) and triethylamine (1 .3 grams, 0.013 moles) can be added to a 15mL three-neck RBF to form a mixture.
  • the mixture can be chilled to 0°C using an ice water bath and acryloyl chloride (1 .38 grams, 0.015 moles) can be added to the mixture drop-wise using an addition funnel to the RBF over a 1 5 minute period.
  • An exemplary R F -QM such as can be provided in
  • solutions of Rp-monomers can be provided to a substrate and allowed to complex, for example, via evaporating the solvent of the solution to form a complex that includes a R F -monomer unit.
  • the surface energy of the complex can be determined using the standard
  • Fowkes method using diiodomethane and water as probe liquids and the Zisman method of surface energy analysis using octane, decane, tetradecane, and hexadecane as probe liquids.
  • Contact angle of drops of Zisman probe liquids, as well as, the Fowkes probes can be determined, using a Kruss Drop Shape Analysis System.
  • Surface energy data of complexes that include R F -Q P monomer units are recited in the following Tables 26-35.
  • Rp-monomers can be incorporated with other monomers and then incorporated into the construction of paper materials or used to treat paper materials.
  • R F -monomers can also be used to prepare polymer solutions.
  • Polymeric solutions can be diluted to a percentage aqueous or non-aqueous solution and then applied to substrates to be treated, such as paper plates.
  • R F -monomers can also be incorporated into copolymers with comonomers such as the dialkyl amino alkyl acrylate or methacrylate or acrylamide or methacrylamide monomer and its amine salt quaternary ammonium or amine oxide form, as described in U.S. Patent 4,147,851 , herein incorporated by reference.
  • Monomers used to form copolymers with acrylates and the R F -monomers include those having amine functionality.
  • copolymers can be diluted in a solution and applied or incorporated directly into or on substrates to be treated, such as paper.
  • Rp-monomers can also be used to form acrylate polymers or other acrylate monomers consistent with those described in U.S. Patent 4,366,299, herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -monomers can be incorporated into paper products or applied thereon.
  • Rp-monomers, acrylates and/or acrylics, for example, can be applied to finished carpet or incorporated into the finished carpet fiber before it is woven into carpet.
  • R F -monomers can be applied to carpet by a normal textile finishing process known as padding, in which the carpet is passed through a bath containing the R F -monomer and, for example, latex, water, and/or other additives such as non-rewetting surfaces. The carpet can then be passed through nip rollers to control the rate of the add-on before being dried in a tenter frame.
  • Rp-monomers may also be incorporated into the fiber by reacting the fiber with Rp-intermediates having isocyanate functionality, R F -isocyanate, for example.
  • R F portions can also be incorporated into materials used to treat calcitic and/or siliceous particulate materials.
  • Rp-monomers can be incorporated into a copolymer where the copolymer can either be part of a formulation to treat these materials or used by itself to treat these materials as described in U.S. Patent 6,383,569, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Rp-compositions and mixtures containing the R F portion can be used to treat substrates including hard surfaces like construction materials such as brick, stone, wood, concrete, ceramics, tile, glass, stucco, gypsum, drywall, particle board, and chipboard.
  • These compositions and mixtures can be used alone or in combination with penetration assistance such as non-ionic surfactants.
  • These compositions can be applied to the surface of calcitic and/or siliceous architectural construction material by known methods, for example, by soaking, impregnation, emersion, brushing, rolling, or spraying.
  • the compositions can be applied to the surface to be protected by spraying. Suitable spraying equipment is commercially available.
  • Spraying with a compressed air sprayer is an exemplary method of application to the particular substrate.
  • U.S. Patents 6,197,382 and 5,674,961 also describe methods for applying and using polymer solutions and are herein incorporated by reference. In an exemplary process of producing solutions having components with
  • R F an Rp-intermediate having a methyl-epoxide functionality may be condensed with a monocarboxylic alkenoic acid to prepare an unsaturated R F -ester (not shown).
  • exemplary methods for producing these kinds of unsaturated esters are described in U.S. Patent 5,798,415, herein incorporated by reference. Additional esters may be prepared according to U.S. Patent 4,478,975, herein incorporated by reference. Components of these solutions can also include dimethyl amino ethyl methacrylate, and these components can be applied in organic and inorganic solvents, as described in U.S. Patent 6,120,892 herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -monomers can also be combined with other monomers to produce copolymers or in solutions with amido and sulfur monomers as described by U.S. Patent 5,629,372 herein incorporated by reference.
  • Rp-intermediates having amine functionality can also be reacted with tetrachlorophthalic anhydride using U.S. Patent 4,043,923 as an exemplary reaction scheme (not shown).
  • U.S. Patent 4,043,923 is herein incorporated by reference.
  • the reaction product can be mixed with a carpet cleaning solution to provide soil repellency. Referring to scheme (67) below, urethanes, including R F portions can be prepared from R F -intermediates.
  • R F -intermediate R F -OH
  • R F -SCN hexamethylene diisocyanate polymers
  • Another method for preparing urethanes includes reacting a Rp-intermediate (R F -SCN) with epichlorohydrin to produce a "twin tailed" Rp-intermediate which can be reacted with diisocyanate and/or a urethane prepolymer as described in U.S. patent 4, 113,748, herein incorporated by reference (not shown).
  • Urethanes having the R F group can then be incorporated as an additive to compositions such as latex paint.
  • U.S. Patent 5,827,919 describes methods for utilizing these urethanes and is herein incorporated by reference.
  • R F -urethanes and polyurethanes can be used to treat substrates such as carpet, drapery, upholstery, automotive, awning fabrics, and rainwear.
  • Exemplary RF-urethanes, such as R F -Q U can include, but are not limited to those listed in Table 36 below.
  • the R F portion can also be complexed as an acid with amine and quaternary ammonium polymers as described in U.S. Patent 6,486,245, herein incorporated by reference (not shown).

Abstract

Production processes and systems are provided that include reacting halogenated compounds, dehalogenating compounds, reacting alcohol’s, reacting olefins and a saturated compounds, reacting reactants having at least two -CF3 groups with reactants having cyclic groups. RF­-compositions such as RF-intermediates, RF-surfactants, RF-monomers, RF­-monomer units, RF-metal complexes, RF-phosphate esters, RF-glycols, RF­-urethanes, and/or RF-foam stabilizers. The RF portion can include at least two -CF3 groups, at least three -CF3 groups, and/or at least two -CF3 groups and at least two -CH2- groups. Detergents, emulsifiers, paints, adhesives, inks, wetting agents, foamers, and defoamers including the RF-surfactant composition are provided. Acrylics, resins, and polymers are provided that include a RF-monomer unit. Compositions are provided that include a substrate having a RF-composition thereover. Aqueous Film Forming Foam ('AFFF') formulations are provided that can include RF-surfactants and/or RF-foam stabilizers are provided.

Description

PRODUCTION PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS, COMPOSITIONS, SURFACTANTS, MONOMER UNITS, METAL COMPLEXES, PHOSPHATE ESTERS, GLYCOLS, AQUEOUS FILM FORMING FOAMS, AND FOAM STABILIZERS
CLAIM FOR PRIORITY This application claims priority to United States Provisional Patent
Application Serial Number 60/540,612, entitled Fluorine Functional Groups,
Fluorine Compositions, Processes for Manufacturing Fluorine Compositions, and Material Treatments, filed January 30th, 2004, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to the field of halogenated compositions, processes for manufacturing halogenated compositions, and, more specifically, fluorinated compositions, processes for manufacturing fluorinated compositions and methods for treating substrates with the fluorinated compositions.
BACKGROUND Compositions such as surfactants and polymers, for example, have incorporated fluorine to affect the performance of the composition when the composition is used as a treatment for materials and when the composition is used to enhance the performance of materials. For example, surfactants incorporating fluorinated functional groups can be used as fire extinguishants either alone or in formulations such as aqueous film forming foams (AFFF). Traditional fluorosurfactants, such as perfluoro-octyl sulfonate derivatives (PFOS), have linear perfluorinated portions. Polymers incorporating fluorine have been used to treat materials. Exemplary fluorinated treatments include compositions such as Scotchguard®. SUMMARY Production processes and systems are provided that include: a reactor having at least one interior sidewall that includes glass; reacting a halogenated compound with an allyl-comprising compound in the presence of water to form a halogenated intermediate; dehalogenating a portion of a heterohalogenated alcohol to form a homohalogenated alcohol, with the heterohalogenated alcohol including at least two -CF3 groups and at least one halogen other than fluorine; reacting an alcohol to form an acrylate, with the alcohol including at least two -CF3 groups and a cyclic group; reacting an olefin with a saturated compound to form a saturated product, with the olefin including at least two -CF3 groups, the saturated compound including at least two other -CF3 groups, and the saturated product including both the -CF3 groups of the olefin and the -CF3 groups of the saturated compound; and/or reacting a first reactant that includes at least two -CF3 groups with a second reactant that includes a cyclic group to form a compound that includes the two -CF3 groups and the cyclic group. RF compositions such as RF-intermediates, RF-surfactants, RF-monomers, RF-monomer units, RF-metal complexes, RF-phosphate esters, RF-glycols, RF-urethanes, and/or RF-foam stabilizers. The RF portion can include at least two -CF3 groups, at least three -CF3 groups, and/or at least two -CF3 groups and at least two -CH2- groups. RF-surfactant compositions such as RF-QS are provided, with the RF portion having a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than the Qs portion, and Qs having a greater affinity for a second part of the system than the RF portion. Detergents, emulsifiers, paints, adhesives, inks, wetting agents, foamers, and defoamers including the RF-surfactant composition are provided. Production processes including providing a first compound, with the first compound including at least two -CF3 groups and two hydrogens, and a portion of the first compound representing the RF portion of an RF-surfactant and adding a Qs portion to the RF portion to form the RF-surfactant are provided. Processes for altering a surface tension of a part of a system having at least two parts are provided that include adding a RF-surfactant. Acrylics, resins, and polymers are provided that include a RF-monomer unit, with the RF portion including, for example, a pendant group of the monomer unit. Compositions are provided that include a substrate having a RF-composition thereover. Production processes are provided that can include providing a RF-monomer and combining the RF-monomer with another monomer to form an oligomer. Exemplary oligomers can include RF-monomer units. RF-metal complexes are provided that can include a metal and a ligand, with the ligand including RF-QMc- The Q c portion being coordinated with the metal of the complex, for example. RF-phosphate esters are provided that can include RF-QPE, with the QPE portion including the phosphorous portion of the ester. R -glycols are provided that can include RF-Qh> with Qh including a hydroxyl portion of the glycol. RF-urethanes are also provided such as RF-Qu> with the Qu portion being the remainder of the urethane. Aqueous Film Forming Foam ("AFFF") formulations are provided that can include RF-surfactants and/or RF-foam stabilizers.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Embodiments are described below with reference to the following accompanying drawings. Fig. 1 is a general view of exemplary RF-compositions. Fig. 2 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 3 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 4 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 5 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 6 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 7 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. Fig. 8 is an exemplary system for preparing compositions according to an embodiment. DETAILED DESCRIPTION Exemplary RF-compositions and production systems are described with reference to Figures 1 -8. Referring to Fig. 1 , a general view of exemplary RF-compositions is shown. RF-compositions include, but are not limited to, R -surfactants, RF-monomers, RF-monomer units, RF-metal complexes, RF-phosphate esters, RF-glycols, RF-urethanes, and or RF-foam stabilizers. In exemplary embodiments, poly-anhydrides, acrylics, urethanes, metal complexes, poly-enes, and/or phosphate esters can include RF portions as well. RF-compositions include compositions that have an RF portion and/or RF portions. The RF portion can be RF-groups, such as pendant groups and/or moieties of compositions. The RF portion can include at least two -CF3 groups and the -CF3 groups may be terminal. The RF portion can also include both -CF3 groups and additional groups containing fluorine, such as -CF2- groups. In exemplary embodiments, the R portion can include a ratio of -CF2- groups to -CF3 groups that is less than or equal to two, such as (CF3)2CF- groups. The R portion can also include hydrogen. For example, the RF portion can include two -CF3 groups and hydrogen, such as (CF3)2CH- groups. The RF portion can also include two -CF3 groups and a -CH2- group, in other embodiments. The RF portion can include at least three -CF3 groups, such as two (CF3)2CF- groups. In exemplary embodiments, the RF portion can include cyclic groups such as aromatic groups. The RF portion can include at least two -CF3 groups and at least four carbons with, for example, one of the four carbons including a -CH2- group. In exemplary implementations, RF-compositions can demonstrate desirable surface energies, affect the surface tension of solutions to which they are exposed, and/or affect the environmental resistance of materials to which they are applied and/or incorporated. Exemplary compositions include, but are not limited to, substrates having RF~compositions thereover and/or liquids having RF-compositions therein. RF portions can be incorporated into compositions such as polymers, acrylate monomers and polymers, glycols, fluorosurfactants, and/or AFFF formulations. These compositions can be used as dispersing agents or to treat substrates such as textile fabric, textile yarns, leather, paper, plastic, sheeting, wood, ceramic clays, as well as, articles of apparel, wallpaper, paper bags, cardboard boxes, porous earthenware, construction materials such as brick, stone, wood, concrete, ceramics, tile, glass, stucco, gypsum, drywall, particle board, chipboard, carpet, drapery, upholstery, automotive, awning fabrics, and rainwear. RF-compositions can be prepared from RF-intermediates. RF portions can be incorporated into RF-compositions and/or can be starting materials for RF-compositions via RF-intermediates. Exemplary RF- intermediates include an R portion described above, as well as at least one functional portion that allows for incorporation of the RF portion into compositions to form RF-compositions. Functional portions can include halogens (e.g., iodine), mercaptan, thiocyanate, sulfonyl chloride, acid, acid halides, hydroxyl, cyano, acetate, allyl, epoxide, acrylic ester, ether, sulfate, thiol, phosphate, and/or amines, for example. Without incorporation and/or reaction, RF-intermediates can include RF-compositions, such as RF-monomers and/or ligands of RF-metal complexes, for example. RF-intermediates can include RF-Qg with RF representing the RF portion and Qg representing, for example, the functional portion, and/or, as another example, an element of the periodic table of elements. In exemplary embodiments, Qg is not a proton, methyl, and/or a methylene group. Exemplary R -intermediates include, but are not limited to, those in Table 1 below.
Figure imgf000008_0001
Figure imgf000009_0001
Figure imgf000010_0001
Figure imgf000011_0001
Figure imgf000012_0001
10 Qg(RrCH)nRF RF(R CH)Qg RF-intermediates can also include CF3 CF3 RF(RrCH)nQg RF(CH2-9H)nQg and/or one or both of CF;3 and C 3 , with Ri including at least one carbon atom, such as -CH2-, for example. In exemplary embodiments, n can be at least 1 and in other embodiments n can be at least 2 and the RF-intermediate can include one or more of
RF(CH2
Figure imgf000013_0001
Figure imgf000013_0002
The RF-intermediate (4-iodo-2-(trifluoromethyl)-
1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluorobutane) may be obtained, for example, at Matrix Scientific, P.O. Box 25067, Columbia, SC 92994-5067.
The RF-intermediate
Figure imgf000013_0003
(1 ,1 ,1-trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-
2,4-pentadiene) can be prepared in an exemplary aspect according to J. Org. Chem., Vol. 35, No. 6, 1970, pp. 2096-2099, herein incorporated by reference. 1 ,1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4-pentadiene can also be prepared according to the following example. The 1 ,1 ,1-trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4-pentadiene can be prepared according to scheme (1) below.
Figure imgf000014_0001
Referring to scheme (1 ) above, pentane (300mL) can be placed in a 500mL three neck flask and chilled below -30°C. To the pentane can be added hexafluoroacetone (59 grams, 0.36 mole), propylene (16.2 grams, 0.38 mole), and anhydrous aluminum trichloride (0.77g, 0.006 mole) to form a mixture. This mixture can be stirred and the temperature can be allowed to warm to room temperature over a 3 hour period. A 15% (wt/wt) aqueous HCl solution (20 mL) can be added to the mixture, and the mixture can be washed 3 times with H2O. The aqueous layer, after the wash, can be decanted off, and the organic layer (pentane and propylene) can be dried with MgSO4. Remaining pentane and propylene can be flash vaporized off at 60°C to give 54.4 grams (70% area percent by gas chromatography) of isomeric 1 ,1 -bis(trifluoromethyl)-3-penten-1 -ol. The crude 1 ,1 -bis(trifluoromethyl)-3-penten-1 -ol (54 grams) can be placed in a 250mL three-neck flask and 125mL of concentrate H2SO4 added to form a mixture which can be stirred and heated slowly to 95°C (separating compounds having lower boiling points from the mixture between 34°C and 55°C). The 1 ,1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-2,4- pentadiene (15.6 grams, 45.5% yield) produced can be separate from the mixture as a gas between 70°C and 74°C. Exemplary RF~intermediates can be prepared from the reactant 2-iodoheptafluoropropane. In an exemplary embodiment, halogenated compounds such as 2-iodoheptafluoropropane can be prepared with reference to Fig. 2. Referring to Fig. 2, a system 20 is depicted that includes a reactor 22 coupled to an alkyl reactant reservoir 24, a halogenating agent reservoir 26, and a halogenated compound reservoir 28. In accordance with exemplary embodiments, system 20 can be used to halogenate an alkyl reactant with a halogenating agent within reactor 22 to form a halogenated compound. Alkyl reactant within alkyl reactant reservoir 24 can include an olefin such as a fluoro-olefin, for example hexafluoropropene. Halogenating agent within halogenating agent reservoir 26 can include a mixture of a salt and a diatomic halogen, such as KF and l2, KF and Br2, and salts such as ammonium salts, for example. In an exemplary embodiment, reactor 22 can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy®, such as hastelloy® C. According to another embodiment, conduits 29 can be configured to provide the contents of reservoirs 24 and 26 to reactor 22 and/or provide the contents of reactor 22 to reservoir 28. Conduits 29 can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy®, such as hastelloy® C. Conduits 29 and reactor 22 both can be lined with glass and/or hastelloy®, such as hastelloy® C, for example. In an exemplary embodiment, the halogenating agent may be provided to reactor 22 with a reactant media, such as a polar, aprotic solvent including, for example, acetonitrile and/or dimethyl formamide (DMF). The reactant media may be added through another conduit (not shown) or, simultaneously with the halogenating agent, through reservoir 26. Together, the halogenating agent and the reactant media can form a mixture within reactor 22 to which the alkyl reactant can be added to form another mixture that includes the agent, the media, and the reactant. The alkyl reactant can be reacted within this mixture to form the halogenated compound. In an exemplary embodiment, the reactant media can be in the liquid phase when the alkyl reactant is reacted within the mixture. The mixture may also be agitated when the alkyl reactant is reacted, for example, and the mixture may also be heated. In an exemplary embodiment, hexafluoropropene may be provided to reactor 22 having KF, l2, and acetonitrile therein and a portion of the contents of reactor 22 heated to at least about 90°C, and/or from about 90°C to about 135°C, to form 2-iodoheptafluoropropane. Hexafluoropropene may also be provided to reactor 22 having KF, l2, and acetonitrile therein with a pressure within reactor 22 being from about 446 kPa to 929 kPa to form 2-iodoheptafluoropropane. The halogenated compound may also be removed from reactor 22 to reservoir 28 via conduit 29. In an exemplary embodiment, conduit 29, between reservoir 28 and reactor 22, can include a condenser (not shown). A portion of the halogenated compound formed within reactor 22 can be transformed into a gas, the gas can be transferred to the condenser, the condenser can return the gas to a liquid, and the liquid can be removed from the condenser and transferred to reservoir 28. In exemplary embodiments, conduit 29, between reactor 22 and 28, being configured to include the condenser, can be referred to as a distillation apparatus. Halogenated compounds such as the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane described above, can be removed from reactor 22 by heating at least a portion of the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane to at least about 40°C. Exemplary halogenated compounds described above may be used to
prepare RF-intermediates such as
Figure imgf000016_0001
(1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane). For example, and by way of example only, 105.14 grams of 2-iodoheptafluoropropane and 10 grams of ethylene can be added to a 800mL Parr reactor. The reactor can be heated to about 180°C for about 6 hours. The reactor can then be cooled and a portion of the contents removed to give about 105.99 grams of the RF-intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodobutane being about 86% pure (as determined by gas chromatography). The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane can also be distilled at 56°C/96 Torr. 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(thfluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane can also be purchased from Matrix Scientific (Catalog number 1104). Halogenated compounds may also be used to prepare RF- intermediates such as the heterohalogenated intermediate 7,8,8,8- tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)-5-iodooct-1 -ene. The RF-intermediate can be prepared and then dehalogenated to form another RF-intermediate according to scheme (2) below. (2)
Figure imgf000017_0001
Referring to scheme (2) above, 2-iodoheptafluoropropane (231 .3 grams, 0.782 mole), 1 ,5-hexadiene (126.6g, 0.767 mole), and 2,2'- azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) (13.6g, 0.083 mole) can be charged together into a clean and dry 750mL stainless steel autoclave apparatus equipped with a rupture disc, thermocouple, heater bands, electronic temperature controller, dip-tube with needle valve, gas vent with needle valve, pressure ' gauge, and agitator. The apparatus can then be sealed and heated slowly to about 60°C where an exotherm can be observed and slowly the temperature can be raised to about 80°C. The apparatus contents can be held at 80°C for about 72 hours giving about 337g of crude material. The contents can be vacuum distilled (53°C/5.0 Torr) to give about 125g 99.6% area percent purity (by gas chromatography) of the RF-intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)-5-iodooct-1 -ene (m/z 377.7 (M+), 251 (M+ -I)), IR spectra: olefinic C-H stretch at (w) 3082 cm"1 , C=C stretch at (w) 1643 cm"1 , and fingerprint bands at 729, 1149, 1224, and 1293 cm"1 , 1 H NMR, 19F NMR, 13C NMR, High Resolution MS can be utilized to determine the 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)-5-iodooct-1 -ene as well. Referring again to scheme (2) above, the 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-
' (trifluoromethyl)-5-iodooct-1 -ene (36.1 grams, 0.095 mole) can be added to a 100mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with a reflux condenser, heating mantle, thermocouple, electronic heat controller, and agitator and heated to 75°C. Tributyltin hydride (34.6 grams, 0.119 mole) can be added drop-wise through an addition funnel over a 3 hour period to form a mixture. An exotherm can be observed during the addition. The mixture can be vacuum distilled (25°C/5.0 Torr) to give 15.6 grams of the RF- intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)oct-1 -ene as a clear liquid having about 99.8% area percent purity (by gas chromatography), and 5.5g of lower purity 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7(trifluoromethyl)oct-1 -ene (m/z 252 (M+), 183 (M+ -CF3), 69 (M+ -CβHn F*), 55 (M+ -C5H4F7)); IR: olefinic C-H stretch at (w) 3087 cm"1 , C=C stretch at (w) 1644 cm"1 , and fingerprint bands at 720, 1135, 1223, and 1315 cm"1 ; 1H NMR (CDCI3, 300MHz) δ 1.40-1 .50 (m, 2H), 1 .54-1 .65 (m, 2H), 1 .95-2.14 (m, 2H), 4.95-5.06 (m, 2H), 5.72-5.85 (ddt, J=17.1 , 10.2, 6.7, 1 H); 19F NMR (CDCI3, CFCI3, 282 MHz) δ -76.57 (d, J=7.9, 7F), -1 83.2 (m, 1 F)). Referring to Fig. 3, system 30 is depicted that includes a reactor 32 configured to receive a halogenated compound, such as the 2-iodoheptafluoropropane described above, from a halogenated compound reservoir 33. The halogenated compound can also include at least two CF3- groups; at least one (CF3)2CF- group; and/or at least two CF3- groups and a halogen other than fluorine, for example. Reactor 32 can also be configured to receive an allyl-comprising compound from an allyl- comprising compound reservoir 34, and water from water reservoir 35. The allyl-comprising compound can include an ester such as allyl acetate, for example. The allyl comprising compound can also include an alcohol such as allyl alcohol, as another example. Reactor 32 can be configured to react the halogenated compound with the allyl-comprising compound in the presence of the water to form an RF-intermediate and provide the RF-intermediate to intermediate reservoir 36. The halogenated compound, allyl-comprising compound and the water can be combined in reactor 32 to a form a mixture. A salt, such as Na2S2O5, may be added to the water to form an aqueous solution prior to forming the mixture, for example. The salt can be as much as 30% (wt/wt) of the solution. In an exemplary embodiment, where the halogenated compound includes 2-iodoheptafluoropropane; the allyl-comprising compound includes allyl acetate; and the aqueous solution includes Na2S2O5, the RF-intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate. Reacting the
2-iodoheptafluoropropane with the allyl acetate in the presence of the solution can include heating at least a portion of the mixture within reactor 32 to at least about 80°C, from about 65°C to about 100°C, and/or from about 80°C to about 90°C. In another exemplary embodiment, where the halogenated compound includes 2-iodoheptafluoropropane; the allyl-comprising compound includes allyl alcohol; and the solution includes Na2S2O5, the RF-intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol. Reacting the
2-iodoheptafluoropropane with the allyl alcohol in the presence of the solution can include heating at least a portion of the mixture within reactor 32 to at least about 80°C, from about 65°C to about 100°C, and/or from about 80°C to about 90°C. An initiator may also be provided to reactor 32 to facilitate the reacting of the halogenated compound with the allyl-comprising compound. An exemplary initiator can include AIBN. Reactor 32 can contain from about 0.01 % (wt/wt) to about 10 % (wt/wt), and/or from about 0.1 %(wt/wt) to 5 %(wt/wt), of the initiator. According to an exemplary embodiment, the RF-intermediate can be provided to intermediate reservoir 36 upon formation within reactor 32. Providing the RF-intermediate can include processes for separating the RF-intermediate from the remaining contents of the reactor, those contents including reactants and or by-products. Exemplary methods for providing the RF-intermediate to reservoir 36 can include liquid/liquid separation and/or distillation. The RF-intermediate formed above may also be reacted to form additional intermediates including additional RF-intermediates. For example, a portion of the intermediate can be unsaturated to form a RF-intermediate that includes a halogenated olefin. In an exemplary embodiment, unsaturating the intermediate can include exposing the intermediate to a reducing agent. The reducing agent can include Zn and/or a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol for example. The Rp-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate may be unsaturated to form the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 - ene, according to one embodiment. The RF-intemnediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate can be combined with a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol, for example, to form another mixture and the other mixture can be heated to at least about 120°C to form the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pent-l-ene. As another example, the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol can be reacted to form the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene in the presence of a reducing reagent such as a mixture of Zn and diethylene glycol. According to another embodiment, the reducing agent can include POCI3, pyridine, and/or a mixture of POCI3 and pyridine. For example, the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol can be reacted to form the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(thfluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene in the presence of a mixture of POCI3 and pyridine. This reaction can be performed while maintaining the temperature of the mixture between from about 0°C to about 5°C, for example.
The RF-intermediate
Figure imgf000020_0001
(4 , 5 , 5 , 5-tetraf I u o ro-4-
(trifluoromethyl)penM -ene) can also be prepared in an exemplary aspect according to Synthesis and Characterization of a New Class of Perfluorinated Alkanes: Tetrabis(perfluoroalkyl)alkane. G. Gambaretto et al., Journal of Fluorine Chemistry, 5892 (2003) pgs 1-7 and United States Patent 3,843,735 to Knell et. al., both of which are herein incorporated by reference. The 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene can also be prepared according to scheme (3) below, for example.
1,1,
Figure imgf000020_0002
Figure imgf000020_0003
nt-1-ene ,5,5,5-tetrafluoro- -(trifluoromethyl) -2-lodopentyl acetate Referring to scheme (3) above, AIBN (9.2g, 0.06 mole),
1 ,1 ,1 ,2,3,3,3-heptafluoro-2-iodopropane (1651 g, 5.6 mole), and 293g of 30% (wt/wt) aqueous Na2S2O5 can be placed into a 2L pressure reactor to form a mixture. The reactor can be sealed and heated to 80°C under autogeneous pressure. Allyl acetate (587g, 5.9 mole) can be slowly added to this mixture and the mixture can be stirred for an additional 4 hours. After stirring, an organic layer can be observed, removed, washed twice with H2O, and dried with MgS04 to give 2212g of 94% (area percent by gas chromatography) the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 2-iodopentyl acetate. Diethylene glycol (2944g) and zinc powder (1330g) can be placed into a 5L 5-neck flask equipped with a simple distillation apparatus to form a mixture. This mixture can be stirred and heated to 120°C and the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate (4149g) can be slowly added. As the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentyl acetate is added, the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pent-l -ene (2075 grams) can be flashed-off and collected in a 1 L ice trap. The contents of the ice trap can be distilled to give 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene >99.5% (area percent by gas chromatography) (b.p. 54°C). The RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl) pent-1 -ene may also be prepared according to scheme (4) below.
Figure imgf000021_0001
Referring to scheme (4) above, about 10.3 grams of 2-iodoheptafluoropropane can be added to a glass pressure tube. The tube can be sealed with a septa, heated to about 75°C and 1 .9 mL of 30% (wt/wt) aqueous Na2S2O5 can be added to the tube via syringe through a septa to form a mixture within the tube. The mixture can be heated to about 80°C, and 0.07 grams of AIBN can be dissolved in allyl alcohol to form a solution. This solution can be slowly added to the tube through the septa to form another mixture. This other mixture can be agitated and maintained at a temperature of about 80°C for 3 hours. The mixture can then be cooled and 11 .2 grams of 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2- iodopentan-1 -ol can be removed as an organic layer upon separation. The RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can have as much as a 93% (area percent by gas chromatography). About 11 g of the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can be added to a glass pressure tube and about 13 grams of 30% (wt/wt) aqueous acetic acid can be added to the other tube to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to about 80°C, and 4 grams of powdered zinc can be added slowly through a solid addition system. The mixture can be allowed to stir for an additional 2 hours before being cooled and adding 2 mL of 1 .5 N HCl to phase separate the mixture. The organic layer can be decanted to give 3 grams of the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ene which can be 75.14% (area percent by gas chromatography). As another example, about 254 grams of diethylene glycol and 127.5 grams of Zn powder can be added into a 1000 mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with a dean-stark apparatus, thermometer, and dip tube to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to 120°C while stirring and about 213.81 grams of the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol can be slowly pumped subsurface into the mixture. About 111 .4 grams of the
RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ene collected which can be 88% (area percent by gas chromatography). The RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 - ene can be prepared according to scheme (5) below.
Figure imgf000022_0001
Referring to scheme (5) above, the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol may be prepared as described above and converted according to scheme (6) below.
Figure imgf000023_0001
P0CI3 ,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro- -(trifluoromethy])pent-1-ene 2-iodopentan-1-ol 00--2255°°CC Referring to scheme (6) above, 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-
(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol (11 .42g, 0.032 mole) and pyridine (84.17g, 1 .06 mole) can be added to a 250mL two-neck round bottom flask equipped with a thermocouple, magnetic stir bar, heating mantle, and a 50 mL pressure equalizing addition funnel containing phosphorus oxychloride (2.23g, 0.015 mole) to form a mixture. The mixture can be chilled to, between 0°C-5°C, and POCI3 can be added drop-wise over a 25 minute period. A color change of the reaction mixture from yellow to dark red and an exotherm can be observed. The mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and then held overnight. Portions of the mixture can be drawn, washed in H2O, and dried over MgSO4, then analyzed by gas chromatography and/or gas chromatography/mass spectrometry. Gas chromatography, gas chromatography/mass spectrometry and 1 H NMR can be utilized to determine the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene. The RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene can be used to prepare other RF~intermediates as well. For example, and by way of example only, 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene can be halogenated to form RF-intermediates that include at least two CF3- groups and a halogen other than fluorine, such as the Rp-intermediate 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)pentane according to scheme (7) below.
Figure imgf000024_0001
,5,5,5-tetrafluoro- -(trifluoromethyl)pent-1-ene 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)pentane
Referring to scheme (7) above, about 45g (0.214 mole) of 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene can be loaded into a 50mL auto syringe and vaporized in a heated coil prior to being fed into a quartz tube via a Claisen adaptor, which terminates into a 250mL two-neck round bottom flask equipped with an HBr scrubber containing a 10% (wt/wt) KOH solution. The quartz tube can be equipped with an internal thermocouple and a dry ice and acetone reflux condenser, and surrounded by an ultra violet light (254 nm) carousel. Simultaneous to the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)penM -ene addition, anhydrous HBr can be fed into the quartz tube from a regulated tank through the same Claisen adaptor. Feed rates for HBr and 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene can be set at 39.3 g/hour and 13.4 g/hour, respectively. About 53.94g (0.19 mole) of product can be collected and washed with NaHCO3 then washed with H2O ,and dried over molecular sieves. Samples of the product can be drawn for gas chromatography/mass spectrometry analysis (m/z 290.8 (M+), 209.0 (M+-HBr), 189.1 (M+-101 .9)). As another example, the RF-intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7- (trifluoromethyl)oct-l -ene, prepared as described above, for example, can be used to prepare another RF-intermediate including the RF-intermediate such as 8-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)octane according to scheme (8) below.
Figure imgf000024_0002
7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-(trifluoromethyl)oct-1-ene 8-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)octane Referring to scheme (8) above, into a 250 mL pressure tube, equipped with a 9 inch Pen-Ray® Hg lamp, pressure gauge, agitator, and dip tube, can be added 67.06 grams (0.266 mole) of the RF-intermediate 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-(trifluoromethyl)oct-1 -ene. The tube can be sealed, the gaseous anhydrous HBr can be bubbled into the system, and the pressure maintained at about 184kPa. The tube can be irradiated for 3 hours, and the mixture within the tube can be washed with NaHCO3, then twice with water and dried over molecular sieves to yield about 68.89 grams (0.21 mole) of the RF-intermediate 8-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)octane. RF-intermediates having alcohol functionality can be used as starting material to produce additional RF-intermediates. For example, and by way of example only, a portion of the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 2-iodopentan-1-ol, described above, may be dehalohydrogenated. For example, RF-intermediates such as the heterohalogenated compound 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol that include at least two CF3- groups and a halogen other than fluorine, may be dehalohydrogenated to form a homohalogenated alcohol. The dehalohydrogenating can include exposing the intermediate to tributyltin hydride, for example. According to an exemplary embodiment, the RF-intermediate can include 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-
2-iodopentan-1-ol and the alcohol can include according to scheme (9) below.
Figure imgf000025_0002
Figure imgf000025_0001
In accordance with scheme (9) above, a 500mL two neck round bottom flask can be equipped with a thermocouple, agitator, and heating mantle. About 212.1 g (0.599 mole) 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4(trifluoromethyl)-2- iodopentan-1 -ol (212.1 g, 0.599 mole) can be added to the flask and heated to about 60°C to 70°C. From a 100mL pressure equalized addition funnel, about 196.4g(0.675 mole) tributyltin hydride can be added drop-wise over a 4 hour period followed by 2 hours of continued heating and stirring. The RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol, can be obtained through vacuum distillation and verified by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry (m/z 228 (M+), 211 (M+-OH), 159 (M+- CF3)). Still another RF-intermediate, e.g., 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl) Pentanol, may be prepared in accordance with the procedures described in scheme (10) below and detailed in US patent 3,467,247, herein incorporated by reference.
Figure imgf000026_0001
perfluoroprop-1-ene 1,1,2,3,4,4,4-hepta(luoro-3- (trifluoromethyl)but-l -ene
Figure imgf000026_0002
In accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the disclosure, a RF-intermediate having alcohol functionality such as the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l-ol and/or 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol described above may be reacted with a halogenated olefin to form another RF-intermediate such as an allyl-ether compound. As described above, the RF-intermediate can include at least two CF3- groups; at least one (CF3)2CF- group; and/or at least three CF3- groups. Exemplary halogenated olefins include olefins that include a halogen other than fluorine such as bromine, for example. 3-bromoprop-1 -ene may be used as a halogenated olefin. The halogenated olefin may be exposed to the alcohol in the presence of a basic solution, such as an aqueous KOH solution. In an exemplary embodiment, a mixture of the alcohol, the halogenated olefin, and a reactant media including a phase transfer catalyst, such as tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulfate, may be prepared, and the basic solution can be added to this mixture while maintaining the mixture below at least 10°C. RF-intermediates including the allyl ether compound
Figure imgf000026_0003
may be prepared by reacting the RF-intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol with 3-bromoprop-1-ene in accordance with the above and scheme (11) below.
1,1,1,3,
Figure imgf000027_0001
3-(1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-yloxy)prop-1-eπe
Referring to scheme (11) above, a 500mL three-neck flask can be equipped with a thermometer, agitator, and a condenser. About 40.86g of NaOH can be dissolved in 120g of deionized H2O to form a mixture. To the mixture can be added about 170.1 grams of hexafluoroisopropan-2-ol. After about 15 minutes, 100.5 grams of 3-bromoprop-1-ene can be added to the mixture at room temperature. The mixture can be agitated for about 2 days. The mixture can then
be phase separated to yield about 178.6g of crude product
Figure imgf000027_0002
being about 92.4% area percent pure (by gas chromatography) with 3.2% area percent allyl bromide. The crude product can be distilled to yield a 99.94% (area percent by gas chromatography) 3-(1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-yloxy)prop-1-ene having a boiling point of 83.5°C. By way of another example, halogenated intermediates including the allyl-
ether compound
Figure imgf000027_0003
may be prepared by reacting the
Rp-intermediate 1 ,2,3,4,4,4-heptafluoro-2,4-bis-(trifluoromethyl)pentane-1 -ol with 3-bromoprop-1-ene in accordance with scheme (9) and scheme (12) below.
3-bromoprop-1-ene
Figure imgf000027_0004
Figure imgf000027_0005
2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4-bis (trilluoromethyl)pentan-l-ol 2-((allyloxy)tnethyl)-1,1, 1,2,3,4,5,5,5- nonafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentane Referring to scheme(12) above, into a 1 L three-neck flask can be added 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4-bis(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol (551 g, 1 .66 mole), allyl bromide (221 .2g, 1 .83 mole) and tetrabutylammonium hydrogen sulfate (5 mole %) to form a mixture. The mixture can be chilled to about 10°C, and 50% (wt/wt) KOH (400 grams) can be added over a 2 hour period. The mixture can then be allowed to stir at 10°C for about 72 hours. After the 72 hours, an additional 100mL of 33% (wt/wt) KOH can be added, and the mixture can be agitated for an additional 12 hours. The reaction can be monitored by removing portions and analyzing, using gas chromatography, and after nondetection of 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol, the mixture can be washed one time with H2O, twice with 10% (wt/wt) HCl, and one more time with H2O. The combined organic layers can be dried with MgSO4 to give about 516 grams of • material containing 20.04 grams of 2,3,4,5,5,5-hexafluoro-2,4- bis(trifluoromethyl)pentyl allyl ether having a 28.21 % (area percent by gas chromatography). According to another embodiment of the disclosure, RF-intermediate including the homohalogenated alcohol, such as 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l-ol described above, may be reacted to form an acrylate. The homohalogenated alcohol can be exposed to an acryloyl compound, for example, to form the acrylate. In an exemplary embodiment, the homohalogenated alcohol can include 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol and the acryloyl compound can include acryloyl chloride. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol can be reacted with the acryloyl chloride in the presence of a basic solution while maintaining the temperature of the solution at about 0°C to form the RF-intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-yl acrylate, for example, according to scheme (13) below.
1 ,1 ,1 ,3,
Figure imgf000028_0001
With reference to scheme (13) above, a lOOOmL three-neck flask can be equipped with a thermometer, agitator, and dropping funnel with a dip tube. Into the flask can be added about 130.6 grams of acryloyl chloride, 168.8 grams 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol, and 1 gram of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol to form a mixture. About 30% (wt/wt) oleum can then be added to the mixture through the dip tube while maintaining the mixture at 60°C- 75°C. After addition, the mixture can be maintained at 60°C- 70°C for about 4 hours. Single stage vacuum distillation of the mixture can yield about 183 grams of crude product 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2- yl acrylate being about 95.7% (area percent by gas chromatography). The crude 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-yl can be distilled further to increase purity to 99.7% (area percent by gas chromatography). By way of another example, the halogenated intermediate including the homohalogenated alcohol, such as 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1-ol described above, may be reacted to form an acrylate. The 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l -ol can be exposed to acryloyl chloride according to
scheme (14) below to form
Figure imgf000029_0002
Figure imgf000029_0001
4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentyl acrylate With reference to scheme (14) above, 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pentan-l -ol (2.59g, 0.011 mole) and triethylamine (1 .3g, 0.013 mole) can be added to a 15mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with a water cooled reflux condenser, thermocouple, agitator, and addition funnel, to form a mixture. The mixture can be maintained at about 0°C using an ice water bath. Acryloyl chloride (1 .38 grams, 0.015 mole) can be added to the mixture through an addition funnel drop-wise over about 15 minutes. After about a 1 hour hold period, 10 mL H2O can be added to the flask, two phases can be observed, and the organic phase separated. The organic phase can be analyzed and a peak observed and confirmed to have a m/z of 283 by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry. By way of another example, a RF-intermediate can be prepared by reacting an alcohol having at least two CF3- groups and a cyclic group such as 3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl alcohol to form an acrylate. The alcohol can be reacted with an acryloyl compound such as acryloyl chloride to form the acrylate. In an
exemplary embodiment, the acrylate can include
Figure imgf000030_0001
For example, and by way of example only, 200mL of CH2CI2 and 25 grams of 3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl alcohol can be placed in a 500mL flask to form a mixture. While stirring the mixture, about 13.8 grams of triethylamine can be added to the mixture. The mixture can then be cooled down in an ice bath and 10.5mL acryloyl chloride can slowly be added to the mixture. The mixture can then be stirred for about an hour and then quenched with an aqueous HCl solution. The mixture can be allowed to phase separate and the organic layer can be washed with saturated KCI solution and dried over MgSO4. The organic solvent can be removed by
evaporation and the remaining 25.16 grams of solid
Figure imgf000030_0002
can be >98% (area percent by gas chromatography). RF-intermediates having a cyclic group can also be prepared. According to an exemplary embodiment, one reactant including at least two CF3- groups such as a heterohalogenated intermediate can be reacted with another reactant including a cyclic group, such as phenol, to form a RF-intermediate that includes at least two CF3- groups and a cyclic group. The one reactant can include an alcohol such as the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol prepared above. For example, and by way of example only, the RF-intermediate can be prepared
Figure imgf000031_0001
Referring to scheme (15) above, about 3.9 grams (0.04 mole) of phenol and 5.5 grams (0.05 mole) of triethylamine can be placed into a clean and dry 25 mL two-neck round bottom flask equipped with an agitator, thermocouple, heating mantle, and a 50 mL pressure equalizing addition funnel containing 4.7 grams (0.042 mole) 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1 -ol to form a mixture. The mixture can be gradually warmed to 68°C and then 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodopentan-1-ol can be added drop-wise over 30
minutes. Yield of
Figure imgf000031_0002
can be 42%. (m/z 320.1 (M+), 94 (M4 226)). By way of another example, a Rp-intermediate can be prepared that is heterohalogenated and contains a cyclic group according to scheme (16) below.
Figure imgf000031_0003
Referring to scheme (16) above, about 13.7 grams (0.079 mole) of 4-bromophenol and 9.0 grams (0.089 mole) of triethylamine can be added to a 50 mL 2-neck round bottom flask equipped with a thermocouple, agitator, heating mantle, and a 50 mL pressure equalizing addition funnel. Contents of the round bottom flask can be gradually heated to 93°C followed by drop-wise addition of 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-2- iodopentan-1 -ol (23.1 g, 0.065 mole) using the addition funnel over 15 minutes. Contents can then be refluxed for 1 hour then sampled and analyzed by gas chromatography. Yield by gas chromatography determination can be 43% for the 2-(4-bromophenoxy)-4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro- 4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol. According to another embodiment of the disclosure, bicyclic halogenated intermediates can be prepared according to schemes (17A and B) below.
Figure imgf000032_0001
Referring to scheme (17A) above, to a three-neck 500 mL flask equipped with a agitator, an inlet for a starting material addition, and a packed column topped with a reflux distillation head, thermocouple, and collection flask can be charged 60.40g of KOH (0.917 mole), 5.86 g of Methyltributylammonium chloride (Aliquat 175, -5% by wt) in 150 mL of deionized water to form a solution. The resulting solution can be heated 97°C and 110 g (0.281 mole) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodopentane can be added drop-wise and sub-surface via syringe pump over the course of 2 hr period. During this addition the resulting product can be collected in the overhead collection flask and the reaction can be continued to be heated until the overhead temperature reached 94°C. The collected material can be dried over magnesium sulfate to give 74.18 g of crude reaction product which by GC analysis consisted on primary product and starting material. The crude reaction material was distilled to afford 42.6 g of (E)-1 ,1 ,1 ,4,5,5,5-heptafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-2-ene (57.5% isolated yield). (1H-NMR (CDCI3): D 6.45 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (dhep, 1H). 13C-NMR (CDCI3): 90.5 (dhep, J=27, 202 Hz, CFCH), 120 (qd, 27, 287 Hz, CF3CF), 121.6 (q, J=220 Hz, CHCF3), 124.4 (m, CHCF), 128.2 (qd, J=21 , 36 Hz, CHCF3). 19F- NMR (CDCI3w/CCI3F): D -66.4 (d, JH-F=3 HzCF3CH), -76.9 (d, JF-F=8 Hz, CF3CF), - 186.9 (m, CF3CF).
Figure imgf000033_0001
Referring to scheme (17B) above, 5.26 grams (0.08 mole) cyclopentadiene and 14.67 grams (0.06 mole) (E,Z)-1 ,1 ,1 ,4,5,5,5-heptafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-2-ene can be added to form a mixture in a stainless steel autoclave that can be equipped with a 6.9x103 kPa rupture disc, agitator, external thermocouple, valve, and pressure gauge. The mixture can be maintained at about 140°C to 250°C under autogeneous pressure for about 4 to 72 hours. 5-(trifluoromethyl)-6-(perfluoropropan-2-yl)bicycle[2.2.1]hept-2- ene yields can be greater than 12 (area percent by gas chromatography). Reaction sample can also be analyzed by gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy. (m/z 330 (M+), 261 (M+ - CF3), 161 (M+ - (CF3)2CF)). Referring to Fig. 4, a system 40 is shown for preparing RF- intermediates that includes reagents such as a taxogen 42, a telogen 44, and an initiator 46 being provided to a reactor 48 to form a product such as a telomer 49. In exemplary embodiments, system 40 can perform a telomerization process. According to an embodiment, taxogen 42 can be exposed to telogen 44 to form telomer 49. In accordance with another embodiment, taxogen 42 can be exposed to telogen 44 in the presence of initiator 46. Reactor 48 can also be configured to provide heat to the reagents during the exposing. Taxogen 42 can include at least one CF3-comprising compound. The CF3-comprising compound can have a C-2 group having at least one pendant CF3- group. In exemplary embodiments, taxogen 42 can include an olefin, such as trifluoropropene. Taxogen 42 can also include 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-6- (trifluoromethyl)hept-l -ene, for example. Telogen 44 can include halogens such as fluorine and/or chlorine. Telogen 44 can include at least four fluorine atoms and can be represented as RF-Q and/or RCι-Q. The RF can be as described above and can include at least four fluorine atoms, and the Q group can include one or more atoms of the periodic table of elements. The Q group can be H or I with the RF group being (CF3)2CF- and/or -CeF13, for example. RF-Q can be 2- iodofluoropropane, for example. The RCι group can include at least one - CCI3 group. Exemplary telogens can include the halogenated compounds described above, such as (CF3)2CFI, C6F13I, and/or trichloromethane. In exemplary embodiments, taxogen 42 can include trifluoropropene and telogen 44 can include (CF3)2CFI, with a mole ratio of taxogen 42 to telogen 44 being from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1 , from about 1 :1 to about 5:1 , and/or from about 2:1 to about 4:1 . Taxogen 42 can include 4,5,5,5- tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-6- (trifluoromethyl)hept-l -ene, and telogen 44 can include (CF3)2CFI, for example. Reactor 48 can be any lab-scale or industrial-scale reactor and, in certain embodiments, reactor 48 can be configured to control the temperature of the reagents therein. According to exemplary embodiments reactor 48 can be used to provide a temperature during the exposing of the reagents of from about 90°C to about 180°C, 60°C to about 220°C and/or 1 30°C to about 1 50°C and, according to other embodiments, reactor 48 can be configured to maintain the temperature of the reagents at about 90°C. Telomer 49, produced upon exposing taxogen 42 to telogen 44, can include
RF(Rτ)nQ and/or RCι(Rτ)nH. The Rτ group can include at least one C-2 group having -CH2-CH- a pendant group that includes at least one -CF3 group, such as CF3. Qg(R CH)nRF Qg(RrCH)RF I I PF PF
Exemplary telomers 49 can include r3 , 3 ancj/or one or bQth Qf
Figure imgf000035_0001
Qa(R CH)nRF Qg(CH2-CH)nRF PF PF 3 and, 3 , with RF including at least one carbon atom, such as -CH2-, for example. In exemplary embodiments, n can be at least 1 and in other embodiments n can be at least 2 and the product can include one or more of CF RF(CH2-CH-CH2-CH)Q 3. f 2' | ) g RF(CH2-CH-CH-CH2)Qg RCι(CH2-CH-CH2-CH)H CF3 CF , CF3 , CF3 CF3 , CF3 RCι(CH2-CH-CH-CH2)Z and/or CF3 ( z being H, Br, and/or Cl, for example. In an exemplary embodiment, the taxogen trifluoropropene can be exposed
to the telogen (CF3)2CFI to form the telomer
Figure imgf000035_0002
anc|j by way 0f another example, trifluoropropene can be exposed to the telogen C6F13I to form the CβFi3(CH2-CH)nl telomer CF3 , |n accordance with another embodiment, the taxogen trifluoropropene can also be exposed to the telogen CCI3H to form the telomer CCI3(CH2-CH)nH CF3 _ products having n being at least 2 can be formed when utilizing an excess of the taxogen as compared to the telogen. For example, at least a 2:1 mole ratio of the taxogen to the telogen can be utilized to obtain products having n being at least 2. For example, and by way of example only, at least two moles of the taxogen trifluoropropene can be exposed to at least one mole of the telogen (CF3)2CF(CH2-9H-CH2-9H)I (CF3)2CFI to form one or both of the telomers CF3 CF3 anC|
Figure imgf000035_0003
In additional embodiments, initiator 46 may be provided to reactor 48 during the exposing of the reagents. Initiator 46 can include thermal, photochemical (UV), radical, and/or metal complexes, for example, including a peroxide, such as di-tert-butyl peroxide. Initiator 66 can also include catalysts, such as Cu. Initiator 46 and taxogen 42 can be provided to reactor 48 at a mole ratio of initiator 46 to taxogen 42 of from between about 0.001 to about 0.05 and/or from between about 0.01 to about 0.03, for example. Initiator 46 and taxogen 42 can be provided to reactor 48 at a mole ratio of initiator 46 to taxogen 42 of from between about 0.001 to about 0.05 and/or from between about 0.01 to about 0.03, for example According to exemplary embodiments, various initiators 46 and telogens 44 can be used to telomerize taxogen 42 as referenced in Table 2 below. Telomerizations utilizing photochemical and/or metal-complex initiators 46 can be carried out in batch conditions using Carius tube reactors 48. Telomerizations utilizing thermal, peroxide, and/or metal complex initiators 46 can be carried out in 160mL and/or 500mL Hastelloy® reactors 48. Telogen 44 (neat and/or as a peroxide solution) can be provided as a gas at a temperature from about 60 °C to about 180 °C and a telogen 44 [T]0 /taxogen 42 [Tx]0 initial molar ratio R0 can be varied from 0.25 to 3.0 and the reaction time from 2 to 22 hrs. The product mixture can be analyzed by gas chromatography and/or the product can be distilled into different fractions and analyzed by 1H and 19F NMR and/or 13C NMR. Mono-adduct (n=1) and di-adduct (n=2) products can be recognized as shown in Table 2 below.
Figure imgf000037_0002
Nos 1-9 and (CF3)2CFI in Runs No 10-13
Figure imgf000037_0001
c) Heavy TFP telomers (n>2) can make up remainder of product d) Initiators can be Perk. 16s(t-butyl cyclohexyl dicarbonate); AIBN; Trig.101 (2,5-bis-(t-butyl peroxy)-2,5-dimethylhexane); and DTBP.
For example, and by way of example only, the taxogen trifluoropropene can be combined with the telogen 2-iodofluoropropane to form the telomer 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5- heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane according to scheme (18) below.
Figure imgf000038_0001
1 ,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoro 1,1,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2- -2-iodopropane (trifluoromethyl)- -iodopentane As another example, the telogen 1 ,1 ,1 , 2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5, 6,6-tridecafluoro-6- iodohexane can be combined with the taxogen trifluoropropene to form the telomer 1 ,1 , 1 ,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5, 6,6,9,9, 9-hexadecafluoro-8-iodononane according to scheme (19) below.
Figure imgf000038_0002
1,1,1,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6- 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,9,9,9- tridecafluoro-6-iodohβxane hexadecafluoro-8-iodononane As another example, a taxogen including at least two CF3- groups such as the Rp-intermediates 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pen-1 -tene and/or 6,7,7,7- tetrafluoro-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene can be combined with a telogen including a saturated compound having at least two CF3- groups to form a telomer including a saturated compound according to scheme (20) below.
Figure imgf000038_0003
4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- 1,1 ,1 ,2,3,3,3- eptafluoro 1,1 ,1 ,2,6,7,7,7-octafluoro-2,6-bis (trifluoromet yl)pent-l -ene -2-iodopropane (trifluoromet yl)-4-iodoheptane Referring to scheme (20) above, 3-perfluoroisopropyl-1 -propene (20 grams, 0.095 mole) and 2-iodoheptafluoropropene (28.1 8 grams, 0.095 mole) can be provided to a glass pressure tube to form a mixture. To this mixture AIBN (0.51 grams) can be added, and the mixture can be heated to and maintained at 85°C for 24 hours. During heating, additional AIBN can be added (0.11 grams after 3 hours and another 0.1 grams after 21 hours). The mixture can then be washed twice with H2O and analysis via gas chromatography can yield a 56% area percent purity.
Figure imgf000038_0004
Referring to scheme (21 ) above, to a sealed and evacuated 250 mL stainless steel autoclave equipped with dip tube and valve, pressure gauge, rupture disk, vent valve, agitator, and a thermocouple, 30.4 grams (0.121 mole) 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene, 41 .32 grams (0.140 mole) heptafluoro-2-iodopropane, and 0.209 grams (0.0013 mole)
2,2'-azobisisobutrylonitrile can be added to form a mixture. The mixture can then be slowly heated to 90°C and held for 24 hours. After the hold period, samples can be drawn and analyzed by gas chromatography and gas chromatography/mass spectrometry. (GC-HP-5 column (RT: 15.9 min), GC/MS (m/z 421 (M+ - I), 211 (M+ - C6H5F7I), 127 (l+)). According to additional embodiments, RF-intermediates, including the telomers, can be further modified to form additional RF-intermediates. For example, and by way of example only, the RF-intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5- heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be modified according to scheme (22) below to produce additional intermediates as shown below.
(t tyl
Figure imgf000039_0001
With reference to scheme (22) above, a 500 mL three-neck flask can be equipped with an agitator, thermocouple, reflux condenser, and septa. About 483 grams (1.23 mole) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be added to the flask. About 12.4 grams (0.08 mole) AIBN can be added to a syringe pump containing about 123 grams (1.23 mole) allyl acetate to form a mixture. The syringe pump can be connected to the flask via a Teflon tube fed through the septa. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-4- iodopentane can be maintained at about 80°C to 90°C. The allyl acetate and AIBN mixture in the syringe pump can be charged (fed) into the flask at a rate of 15 mL per hour. The mixture can be sampled and analyzed by gas chromatography to find 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6- bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate having about 78.3% area percent purity.
Figure imgf000039_0002
2-iodoheptyI acetate With reference to scheme (23) above, a three-neck 250 mL flask can be equipped with a thermocouple, agitator, 50 mL pressure equalizing addition funnel, and a short path distillation apparatus. About 150 grams of diethylene glycol and 26.01 grams (0.4 mole) zinc can be added to the flask to form a mixture. The mixture can be maintained at about 50°C to 65°C and a vacuum can be maintained at about 5.3 kPa to 8.7 kPa. About 33 grams (0.067 mole) 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate can be placed into the 50 mL addition funnel and added drop-wise over about 1 hour. Approximately, in concert to the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)-2-iodoheptyl acetate addition, 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)hept-1-ene can be reactively distilled and collected in a 50 mL receiver flask. A total of about 39.7 grams of the crude RF-intermediate 6,7,7,7- tetrafluoro-4,6-bis(trifluoromethyl)hept-1-ene can be collected having 53% area percent purity by gas chromatography. Referring to Fig. 5, a system 50 is shown that can be utilized for the production of telomers that include ester functionality. System 50 can include a reactor 56 that is configured to receive reagents such as an ester 54 and a telomer 52, as well as, in other embodiments, an initiator 59. Telomer 52 can be fluorinated and can be represented by the general formula Q1(RT)nQ2- The Q^ and Q2 groups can include one or more atoms of the periodic table of elements including Q and/or Qg and according to exemplary embodiments, the Q^ and Q2 groups need not be different nor need they be identical. The Qi group, in exemplary embodiments, can include at least one -CF3 group, and in other embodiments at least two -CF3 groups. The Qi group can also include a -CF(CF3)2 group in one embodiment and a -C63 group in other embodiments. The Q2 group can include halogens in certain embodiments and in other embodiments can include hydrogen. Telomer 52 can include RF-intermediates including telomer 49 described above, such as (CF3)2CF(CH2-9H)nl C6F13(CH2-9H)nl CCI3(CH2-CH)nH CF3 j CF3 ( and/or CF3 , for example. Ester
54 can include an allyl-comprising compound such as allyl acetate. According to an additional embodiment, initiator 59 can be utilized within reactor 46 during the exposing of ester 54 to telomer 52. Initiator 29 can include compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN), peroxides such as: dibenzoyl peroxide, tert-amyl peroxypivalate, tert-butyl peroxypivalate, DTBP (di-tert-butyl peroxide), and/or a metal complex such as copper chloride, ferric chloride, palladium and/or ruthenium complexes can also be used. Ester 54 can be exposed to telomer 52 to form an ester-comprising telomer 58. Ester-comprising telomer 58 can include the composition QI(RT)ΠRE, with the RE group including at least one ester group and/or Qg, such as an acetate group. In exemplary embodiments, telomer 52 can include the formula RF(RT)ΠQ2, with the RF group including at least one fluorine atom such as a -CF3 group and/or as described above. RF(Rτ)nQ2 can be exposed to ester 54 to form an ester-comprising telomer 58 such as RF(RT)RE, for
example. In accordance with an embodiment, the telomer
Figure imgf000041_0001
can be exposed to the ester allyl acetate to form the ester-comprising telomer (CF3)2CF(CH2-9H)nCH2CHCH2OCCH3 CF3 I O . In exemplary embodiments, reagents within reactor 56 can be heated to at least 82°C for approximately 10 hours during the exposing of the reagents. The reagents can also be exposed in the presence of AIBN at the same temperature for the same amount of time, for example. In some embodiments, the process of system 50 can be exothermic and the initiator may prevent achieving a temperature that may decompose and/or rearrange products. For example, when the temperature of the contents of the reactor is higher than 90°C and a dibenzoyl peroxide initiator is utilized, the reaction temperature of ester and telomer can rise to about 160°C -180°C, and at such high temperature the ester obtained can undergo a thermal rearrangement to RFCH2CH(OAc)CH2l, for example. AIBN can be used as the initiator and added stepwise to avoid such a rearrangement and provide a product yield up to 80-82% (by gas chromatography) or 75% (by distillation). Referring to Fig. 6, system 60 includes a reactor 62 configured to receive reagents such as a telomer 64 and a reducing agent 66 and form an allyl-comprising telomer 68. Telomer 64 can include RF-intermediates such as ester-comprising telomer 58 described above. For example, telomer 64 can include a Q (Rτ)nRE, such as
(CF3)2CF(CH2-9H)nCH2CHCH2OCCH3 CF3 I O Reducing agent 66 can include one or more reagents, such as a mixture of activated zinc and methanol. Other reducing agents may be utilized. Reactor 62 can be configured to expose agent 66 to telomer 64 at approximately 65°C and reflux these materials for approximately 3 hours, plus or minus 2 hours. For example, and by way of (CF3)2CF(CH2-9H)nCH2CHCH2OCCH3 example only, telomer 64, such as CF3 I O t Can be added to reactor 62 containing a 2-fold excess of activated Zn dust in MeOH solution. Reactor 62 may be configured to stir and/or even vigorously stir the solution during and/or after addition of telomer 64. According to some embodiments, upon addition of telomer 64, the reaction of the telomer 64 with agent 66 can be exothermic and telomer 64 can be added drop-wise under reflux of MeOH to control exotherms, if desired. The conversion of telomer 64 can be quantitative with the overall yield of allyl-comprising telomer 68 being approximately 75% after distillation, for example. In exemplary embodiments, allyl-comprising telomer 68 can include QI(RT)ΠRA, with the RA group including Qg as described above and/or at least one allyl group. Allyl- comprising telomer 68 can include RF(Rτ)nRA, and as such, include at least one fluorine atom. For example and by way of example only, the agent zinc and methanol can be (CF3)2CF(CH2-9H)nCH2CHCH2OCCH3 exposed to the telomer CF3 I O to form the allyl- (CF3)2CF(CH2-QH)nCH2CH=CH2 comprising telomer CF3 . Allyl-comprising telomer 68 can be used as a monomer in the formation of polymers, for example. In exemplary embodiments, systems 40, 50, and 60 can be aligned sequentially to produce an allyl-comprising telomer 68 from taxogen 42 and telogen 44, when referring to Figs. 4, 5, and 6 in sequence. In this alignment, telomer 49 produced in system 40 can be utilized as telomer 52 in system 50, and telomer 58 produced in system 50 can be utilized as telomer 64 in system 60. As such, allyl-comprising telomer
68 can include a fluoromonomer that includes a telomer of trifluoropropene. Telomers
49, 52, 64, and 68 can include
Figure imgf000042_0001
with n being at least 1. For example, and by way of example only, referring to Table 3 below, telomers, esters, and monomers having the recited characteristics can be produced.
Figure imgf000043_0001
*GC analysis : column OV1 (3% silicone grease on the chromosorb G) ; 2m length, 1/8" diameter, 50-200°C ramp.
According to another embodiment of the disclosure, the Rp-intermediate including the telomers described above can be modified according to scheme (24) below.
Figure imgf000044_0001
In accordance with scheme (24) above, a 150mL three-neck round bottom flask can be equipped with a reflux condenser, agitator, thermocouple, heating mantle, and a 150mL pressure equalized addition funnel that can contain 70 mL of allylmagnesium bromide in a 1.OM solution of diethyl ether. About 27.64 grams (0.07 mole) of 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,5,5,5-heptafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodopentane can be added to the flask. The allylmagnesium bromide solution can be added slowly to the flask wherein an exotherm can be observed along with a change in color from orange to colorless. The allylmagnesium bromide can be added over a period of 2.5 hours then the reaction mixture can be held at room temperature overnight. After the hold period, the reaction mixture can be washed in water to quench any unreacted allylmagnesium bromide, an organic layer can be observed, decanted off, and dried over MgSO4. Samples of dried organic layer can be analyzed by gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy. (m/z 306 (M+), 237 (M+-CF3)). In accordance with another embodiment of the disclosure, RF-intermediates including the telomers described above can be modified to form additional RF-intermediates. For example, and by way of example only, the Rp- intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,6,7,7,7-octafluoro-2,6-bis (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodoheptane can be modified to form the RF-intermediate 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl)propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene according to scheme (25) below.
Figure imgf000045_0001
6,7,7,7-tetrafIuoro- -(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1-ene
HBr hv
Figure imgf000045_0002
Referring to scheme 25 above, a dried flask can be charged with
Figure imgf000045_0003
(488 grams) and anhydrous ether (306 mLI) to form a mixture. The mixture can be cooled to 0°C with an ice/water bath and 1 M allylmagnesium bromide in ether (976mL) can be added slowly to the mixture over 3 hours and the mixture allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride (500mL) can then be added drop-wise to the mixture at a rate to keep the temperature of the mixture at <5°C, and deionized water (250mL) can be added to aid in the dissolution of the salts and form a biphasic mixture from which the organic layer can be separated and dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and distilled at 5 Torr and 41 °C -43°C to afford a clear liquid (361 g, 84.2%). Residual ether can be boiled
off to afford 359.6 grams
Figure imgf000045_0004
as can be identified by NMR. As another example, into a dry 500 mL round bottom flask, equipped with an addition funnel, can be added 120 grams (0.24 moles) of (1 ,1 ,1 ,2,6,7,7,7- octafluoro-2,6-bis(trifluoromethyI)-4-iodoheptane) to 150 mL of anhydrous THF to form a mixture. Under a N2 atmosphere, the mixture can be cooled to 0°C while stirring vigorously. To the mixture can be added 120 mL of a 2M solution of allylmagnesium bromide in THF at a rate to maintain a temperature of the mixture of less than about 5°C. After addition of the allylmagnesium bromide solution, the flask can be allowed to slowly warm to room temperature. A white powdery suspension can form during the reaction and can be removed by suction filtration to form a filter cake. The filter cake can be washed with 1 00 mL of THF, and the filtrate collected and added to 3 to 5 mL of water to destroy any remaining allylmagnesium bromide. The THF can be distilled off and the remaining solution can be washed with water. The organic layer (90.7 grams) can be dried with MgSO4 and distilled at 40°C -41 °C/5 Torr to isolate about 63 grams of 63.5% (area percent by gas chromatography) RF- intermediate 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl) propyl)- 6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene. As further disclosed in scheme (25) above, the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3- tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene can be modified to produce another Rp-intermediate. Referring to the scheme above, into a 100 mL pressure tube equipped with a 9 inch Pen-Ray® Hg lamp, pressure gauge, agitator, and dip tube can be added 60 grams (0.14 moles) of 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- (trifluoromethyl) propyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)hept-1 -ene. The tube can be sealed and gaseous anhydrous HBr can be bubbled into the system to maintain a pressure of 101.37kPa to 308.27kPa. The tube can be irradiated with the Pen-Ray lamp until the pressure ceases to decrease. The mixture can then be washed once with water and once with 10% aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer can assay as high as 92.7% (area percent by gas chromatography) and can be dried with MgSO4 and distilled at 73°C-74°C/3.1 Torr.
Figure imgf000046_0001
1,1,1 ,2,9,10,10,10-octafluoro- 2,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4-iododecane
Figure imgf000046_0002
Referring to scheme (26) above, to a 250mL three-neck round bottom flask equipped with thermocouple, agitator, and reflux condenser 71.05 grams (0.13 mole) of the RF-intermediate 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,8,9,9,9-octafluoro-2,8-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4-iodooctane can be added, then chilled to 0°C in an ice bath. About 121.37 grams (0.14 mole) of 1.0M allylmagnesium bromide in diethylether can be added drop-wise with a 150mL pressure equalized addition funnel over a period of 3 hours. Following the addition, the solution can be gradually warmed to room temperature and held for 48 hours. The mixture can then be quenched with deionized water and the organic layer decanted off and dried over MgSO . The crude RF-intermediate 8,9,9,9-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)propyl)- δ-(trifluoromethyl) non-1 -ene can be assayed by mass spectrometry (m/z 462 (M+) , 420.1 (M+ - 42), 279.1 (M+ - 183)). According to an additional embodiment, RF-intermediates, including the telomers described above, such as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,9,9,9-hexadecafluoro-8-iodononane, can be modified according to scheme (27) below.
Figure imgf000047_0001
6,6,7,7, An embodiment of the disclosure provides RF-surfactant compositions that include the RF portions described above. Exemplary
RF-surfactant compositions can be referred to as RF-QS. In a system having at least two parts, RF can have a greater affinity for a first part of the system than Qs, and Qs can have a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF. The system can include liquid/liquid systems, liquid/gas systems, liquid/solid systems, and/or gas/solid systems. Liquid/liquid systems, for example, can include systems having at least one part that includes water and another liquid part that is hydrophobic relative to the part that includes water. Liquid/liquid systems can also include systems of which water is not a part of the system, such as hydrocarbon liquid systems. In exemplary embodiments, RF can be hydrophobic relative to Qs and/or Qs can be hydrophilic relative to RF. RF can be hydrophobic and Qs can be hydrophilic, for example. The hydrophobic portion can be referred to as the tail of the RF-surfactant? and the hydrophilic portion can be referred to as the head of the RF-surfactant. The RF-surfactants can include those surfactants having a tail or hydrophobic portion containing fluorine. The RF-surfactant tail or hydrophobic portion can be referred to as an RF portion, and the RF-surfactant head or hydrophilic portion can be referred to as a Qs portion. Exemplary RF-surfactants include those in Table 4 below.
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
RF-surfactants can also include
Figure imgf000052_0001
NMR: 1H (D6-DMSO, 300 MHz) δ 1 .8 (m, 2H), 2.6 (m, 2H), 3.0 (m, 2H), 3.1 (bs, 6H), 3.6 (m, 2H), 3.9 (m, 4H), 7.9 (bs, 1 H); 13C (D6-DMSO, 75 MHz) δ 22.6, 22.9, 23.1 , 43.1 , 50.0, 60.8, 64.4, 88-93 (ds), 114.5-126.5 (qd); and 19F (CFCI3> D6-DMSO, 282 MHz) δ -76.4 (d, 6.95 Hz, 6F), -1 83.4 (m, 1 F) According to an embodiment of the disclosure, RF-surfactant production processes are provided. Exemplary RF-surfactant production processes include providing an RF-intermediate such as the RF-intermediates described above having at least two -CF3 groups. Exemplary RF-intermediates can include RF-Qg with Qg being designated for later attachment to the Qs portion of RF-surfactants, for example. Exemplary methods for preparing surfactants can be found in German Offen. 1 ,924,264 and U.S. Patent 3,721 ,706 both of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Exemplary methods for preparing RF-surfactants are described below. . Referring to Fig. 7, a system 70 is shown that can be configured to perform a process that includes reacting an RF-intermediate to form a Rp-surfactant, with the RF-intermediate including at least one fluorine atom, for example. System 70 can include reactors 71 and 75. Reactor 71 can be configured to expose an RF-intermediate 72 to a radical reagent 73. In exemplary embodiments, RF-intermediate 72 can include an RF portion, such as those described above. Reagent 73 can include HSCH2CO2H, for example. Rp-intermediate 72 can be exposed to reagent 73 in the presence of a radical initiator, such as AIBN to produce a RF-intermediate 74 such as RF-C3H6-S-CH2CO2H, for example. In exemplary embodiments, reactor 75 can be configured to combine RF-intermediate 74 and reagent 76 to produce a RF-surfactant 77. Reagent 76 can include HO(CH2CH2O)n-CH3 and RF-surfactant 77 can include RF-C3H6-S-CH2C(O)(CH2CH2)nCH3, with n being at least 1 , for example. As another example, reagent 73 can include radical initiators and/or ethylene
(CH2=CH2). Upon exposing RF~intermediate 72 to reagent 73 within reactor 71 , RF-intermediate 74, such as RF-CH2CH2I+N(CH3)3, can be produced, for example. Reactor 72 can be configured to expose RF-intermediate 74 to reagent 76 to form Rp-surfactant 67. Reagent 76 can include pyridine, for example. RF-surfactant 77 can include RF-surfactants such as RF-QS, with Qs including a quaternary ammonium ion such as -CH2CH2N+(CH3)3r, for example. In accordance with another embodiment, RF-intermediates can be converted to thiocyanate RF-intermediates such as RF-SCN, by reacting heterohalogenated RF-intermediates such as iodine RF-intermediates, for example, with potassium thiocyanate. The reaction can be carried out in absolute ethanol using acetic acid as a catalyst. A 30% molar excess of KSCN as compared to the RF-intermediate can be used. The ethanol, acetic acid, Rp-intermediate, and KSCN can be charged to a reaction vessel, heated to reflux, and held there until the reaction is complete. The reaction progress can be monitored by analyzing the reaction mixture for RF-intermediate by gas chromatography. Upon reaction completion, the Kl formed can be filtered off the reaction mixture, the ethanol can be evaporated away, and the thiocyanate RF-intermediate can be washed twice with hot (70°C) water. Reagent 73 can include a mixture of the KSCN, ethanol and acetic acid described above. The RF-intermediate can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 83°C and/or reflux temperature to produce an intermediate 74 such as RF-SCN. RF-intermediate 74 can then be exposed to reagent 76 to form intermediate 77. RF-intermediate 74, such as RF-SCN can be wet chlorinated to give the sulfonylchloride of the RF-intermediate as shown below in exemplary reaction sequence (28).
2RF-SCN + 8H2O + 9CI2 → 2RF-SO2CI + 2CO2 + N2 + 16HCI (28)
The RF-SCN, water, and acetic acid as a solvent can be charged to reactor 75. Chlorine can be added to the reaction vessel in 30 minute increments while the temperature of the mixture within reactor 75 is maintained at 20°C to 30°C. At the end of each 30 minutes of chlorine addition, 0.314 grams of water can be added to reactor 75. For each gram of chlorine that is added, 4.5 moles per mole of RF-SCN can be added. When this amount has been added, the mixture within reactor 75 can be sampled and analyzed for RF-SCN by gas chromatography. When the reaction is complete, the mixture within reactor 75 can be diluted to 65% (wt/wt) RF-SO2CI with chloroform, heated to about 40°C and washed with twice its volume of 40°C water. After the wash, the washed mixture can be dried by azeotropic distillation of the water using a Dean Stark trap. Karl Fischer titration can be used to determine water amount. Water content can be less than 0.1 %- As described above, reagent 76 can include a mixture of Cl2, H2O, and acetic acid. RF-intermediate 74 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 30°C to 40°C to produce Rp-intermediate 67, such as RF-SO2CI. Referring to Fig. 8, in an additional embodiment, a system 80 configured to produce RF-surfactants from RF-intermediates, for example, those produced in system 70, such as RF-intermediate 77, is shown. System 80 can include reactors 81 and 82. Reactor 81 can be configured to expose an RF-intermediate 83, such as RF-intermediate 77 described above, to reagent 84. RF-intermediate 83 can have the general formula RF-SO2CI described above, for example. In an exemplary embodiment, exposing RF-intermediate 83 to reagent 84 esterifies intermediate 83 to form RF-intermediate 85, which can include a sulfonamidoamine. Dimethylaminopropylamine (H2N(CH2)3N(CH3)2, DMAPA) can be used to esterify intermediate 83 as shown as exemplary reaction scheme (29) and described below.
RF-SO2CI + H2N(CH2)3N(CH3)2→RF-S02NH(CH2)3N(CH3)2 + HCl (29) The esterification can be performed in a chloroform solution at reflux.
The solvent and reactants can be as dry as having at least less than 0.1 % by weight water. The DMAPA can be dissolved in 1 .5 times its volume in chloroform in reactor 81 which can be immersed in a cooling bath. A DMAPA molar equivalent of 65% (wt/wt) RF-SO2CI in chloroform solution can be added to reactor 81 while maintaining the temperature of the contents of reactor 81 at less than 50°C. When the addition is complete, the temperature of the contents can be raised to reflux and held at reflux for 5 hours. Reactor 81 contents can then be cooled to 60°C and washed 3 times with equal volumes of 60°C water. Chloroform remaining can be stripped under vacuum, and the neat product can be washed twice with 90°C water. The washed neat product can be sampled and analyzed for free DMAPA using a wet chemistry method that is specific for primary amines. According to an exemplary embodiment, reagent 84 can include a mixture of DMAPA and CHCI3. Intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from between about 30°C-65°C to produce RF-intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000055_0001
for example. As another example, reagent 84 can include a mixture of 2-aminoacetic acid and CHCI3 and intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from between about 30°C-65°C to produce RF-intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000055_0002
Reagent 84 can also include a mixture of 2-(methylamino)acetic acid and CHCI3 and intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature from
between about 30°C-65°C to produce intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000055_0003
Intermediate 85 can then be betainized, for example, with an acetate reagent such as sodium monochloroacetate within reactor 82 to yield
RF-surfactant 87, such as the amphoteric RF-surfactant RF-SO2NH(CH2)3N+(CH3)2(CH2CO2Na) as shown as exemplary reaction sequence (30) and described below.
RFSO2NH(CH2)3N(CH3)2 + CICH2COONa → RFSO2NH(CH2)3N+(CH3)2(CH2CO2Na) (30)
The sulfonamide can be dissolved in enough absolute ethanol to give a 40% (wt/wt) solution. An equimolar amount of sodium monochloroacetate can be added to reactor 82 containing the 40% (wt/wt) solution to form a mixture. The mixture can then be refluxed for 8 hours and then sampled and titrated for free OH\ If OH" is greater than 1 .5 x 1 0"3 eq., the mixture is refluxed for an additional hour and reanalyzed. This sequence can be repeated until free OH" is less than 1 .5 x 10"3 eq. If there is no decline in OH" in two succeeding samplings, additional sodium monochloroacetate can be added, the amount being calculated as the amount needed to lower the OH" to a value below 1 .5 x 10"3 eq. The by-product NaCI can be filtered off and sufficient water is added to give a pourable solution at ambient temperature. Reactor 82 can be configured to expose intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000056_0001
to reagent 86 to form RF-surfactant 87. According to an
exemplary embodiment, reagent 86 can include a mixture of
Figure imgf000056_0002
and ethanol. Intermediate 83 can be exposed to the mixture while the mixture is refluxing to produce RF-
surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000056_0003
, for example. As another example, reagent 86 can include a mixture of 50% (wt/wt) H2O2/H2O and intermediate 83,
such as
Figure imgf000056_0004
for example, can be exposed to the mixture at a temperature of about 35°C to produce RF-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000056_0005
Reagent 86 can also include
1 -(chloromethyl)benzene, and intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000056_0006
can be exposed to the 1-(chloromethyl)benzene to produce Rp-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000056_0007
In accordance with another example, reagent 86 can include
1 -(bromomethyl)benzene, and intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000056_0008
can be exposed to the 1 -(bromomethyl)benzene to produce RF-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000056_0009
As another example, reagent 86 can include bromomethane and intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000057_0001
can be exposed
to the bromomethane to produce RF-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000057_0002
Reagent 86 can also include chloromethane and intermediate 85, such as
Figure imgf000057_0003
can be exposed to the chloromethane to produce
RF-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000057_0004
In accordance with another embodiment, reagent 86 can also include a basic solution such as NaOH and intermediate 85, such as
an be exposed to the solution to produce RF-surfactant 87, such as
Figure imgf000057_0005
Systems 70 and 80 may be combined in sequence and RF-surfactants produced according to schemes (31 ) - (45) below. Where LC/MS can be used to identify compounds, Table 5 of LC/MS parameters, below, can be used.
Figure imgf000058_0004
Figure imgf000058_0001
1,1,1,2-tetrafluoro-2- 1,1,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl) 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-(trifluoromethyl)butane- (trifluoromethyl)-4-iodobutane -4-thiocyanatobutane 1-sulfonyl chloride
iamine
Figure imgf000058_0002
Figure imgf000058_0003
In accordance with scheme (31) above, a mixture of 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoro-4-iodo-2- trifluoromethyl-butane (100 grams) and potassium thiocyanate (39 grams) can be dissolved in 55 mL of ethanol and 1 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux, where it can be allowed to reflux for a couple of days. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and concentrated to dryness under vacuum. Deionized water (100mL) can be added to the dry solids and the resulting oil can be decanted and identified to be 1,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-4- thiocyanate-2-trifluoromethyl-butane (69.9 grams, 88.4%) by NMR analysis. A mixture of the 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-4-thiocyanate-2-trifluoromethyl-butane (25.5 grams) in 25 mL of acetic acid containing 2 mL of water can be sparged with chlorine gas at 40°C for a couple of days with intermittent heating of the mixture to form a heterogeneous mixture. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and diluted with chloroform (50mL). The organic portion can be washed twice with water, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum. The resulting yellow oil can contain large amounts of residual acetic acid by NMR analysis. The yellow oil can be dissolved in chloroform and washed twice with water (25mL/each), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum and identified to be 4,4,4,3-tetrafluoro-4- trifluoromethyl-butanesulfonyl chloride (23.8 grams, 80%) by NMR analysis. The 4,4,4,3-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-butanesulfonyl chloride (23.8 grams) can be dissolved in 50 mL of ether and added drop-wise to a solution of dimethylaminopropylamine (8.2g) and 11 .2 mL of triethylamine (TEA) at ambient over 20 minutes to form a mixture. The mixture can be partitioned between ethyl acetate (100mL) and water (150mL). The organic layer can be separated and washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (50mL) and brine (50mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow semi solid. NMR and LC/MS analysis can indicate the yellow semi solid can be a mixture of the mono and bis sulfonated material. The semi solid can be triturated in hexanes, and the filtered solid identified as 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3- trifluoromethyl-butane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino -propyl)-amide (9.9 grams) by NMR analysis. The 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-butane-1-sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (10 grams) can be dissolved in 50 mL of ethanol containing 3.2 grams of sodium chloroacetate to form a mixture and can be refluxed overnight. The mixture can be filtered, concentrated under vacuum, and distilled twice using chloroform to afford
Figure imgf000060_0001
by NMR analysis. The product can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 60°C and 0.1 Torr to afford a pale yellow foam like solid (10 grams, 84%).
Figure imgf000060_0002
In accordance with scheme (32) above, 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3- trifluoromethyl-butane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide
(9 grams) can be dissolved in 20 mL of ethanol and 3.5 mL of water and treated with 5.9 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide. The resulting mixture can be heated to 35°C overnight and the reaction determined to be complete by LC/MS analysis. Norit, a decolorizing carbon (4 grams) can be added to the mixture, stirred for 30 minutes, and filtered through celite. Additional carbon (4 grams) can be added, the mixture heated to 50°C, the heated mixture filtered through celite again, the resulting filter cake washed with ethanol, and the combined filtrates concentrated under vacuum to leave white solids. The white solid can be identified to be
Figure imgf000060_0003
by NMR and LC/MS analysis. The white solid can be dried on the Kugelrohr at 45°C and 0.1 Torr to afford 8.7 grams (92%) product by NMR analysis.
Figure imgf000060_0004
In accordance with scheme (33) above, 5.0 grams of 3,4,4,4-tetrafluro-3- trif luoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonic acid-(3-dimethylamino-propyl) amide can be dissolved in 15 mL of t-butyl methyl ether in a three-necked, 100mL round bottom flask equipped with a stir bar, reflux condenser and a thermocouple. 1.75 grams of benzyl chloride can be added to the flask to form a mixture and the mixture heated to reflux (56°C) and agitated. A white precipitate can form when the temperature reaches 56°C. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature after 3 hours. The solids can be collected by filtration, washed with chloroform and air-dried to afford 2.83 grams of as identified by NMR.
Figure imgf000061_0002
1-(bromomethyl)benzene
Figure imgf000061_0003
Figure imgf000061_0001
In accordance with scheme (34) above, 5.0 grams of 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3- trifluoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonic acid-(3-dimethylamino-propyl) amide can be dissolved in 15.0 mL of t-butyl methyl ether in a three-necked, 100mL round bottom flask equipped with a stir bar, reflux condenser and a thermocouple. Benzyl bromide (2.36 grams) can be added to the flask to form a mixture and the mixture heated to reflux (56°C) and agitated for 2 hours. A white precipitate can form when the temperature of the mixture reached 56°C. The mixture can become too thick to stir after 2 hours. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and the solids collected by filtration and dried in a vacuum oven at 45°C
overnight to afford 6.24 grams (99.6%)
Figure imgf000061_0004
as can be identified by NMR.
Figure imgf000061_0005
In accordance with scheme (35) above, 10.0 grams of 3,4,4,4-tetrafluro-3- trifluoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonic acid-(3-dimethylamino-propyl) amide can be dissolved in 13.8 mL of a 2.0M solution of bromomethane in diethyl ether in a 25 x 250mm culture tube with a teflon lined cap to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to 45°C for 4 hours to form a thick precipitate. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and the solids collected by filtration and dried under vacuum to afford a white solid that can be identified as
7.46 grams (59.9%)
Figure imgf000061_0006
by LC/MS.
Figure imgf000061_0007
In accordance with scheme (36) above, 5.0 grams of 3,4,4,4-tetrafluro-3- trifluoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonic acid-(3-dimethylamino-propyl) amide can be dissolved in 13.8 mL of a 1.0M solution of chloromethane in t-butyl methyl ether in a three-necked, 10OmL round bottom flask equipped with a stir bar, reflux condenser and a thermocouple to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to reflux (56°C) and stirred for 4 hours to form a heavier precipitate that can be filtered to yield 0.56 grams of
Figure imgf000062_0001
that can be identified by NMR. RF-surfactants can also be prepared in accordance with scheme 37 below.
Figure imgf000062_0002
2-aminoacβtlc acid
Figure imgf000062_0003
In accordance with scheme (38) above, 9.68 grams of glycine benzyl ester hydrochloride can be partitioned between 100 mL of methylene chloride and 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The layers can be separated and the bottom organic layer washed with 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The layers can be separated again, and the organic layer dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford 5.42 grams (68.3%) of a light yellow oil identified as benzyl glycinate by NMR. A solution of 5.421 grams of the benzyl glycinate demonstrated above, in 15.0 mL of methylene chloride in a three-necked, 100mL round bottom flask equipped with a stir bar, addition funnel with a nitrogen inlet and a thermocouple, can be chilled to 0°C-5°C in an ice bath. Another solution of 4.75 grams of 3,4,4,4-tetrafluro-3-trifluoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonyl chloride, demonstrated above, in 15.0 mL of methylene chloride can be added, drop-wise under nitrogen, at such a rate as to keep the reaction temperature <5°C, (15 min., Tma)(=3.50C) to form a mixture. The mixture can be stirred for 1 hour at <5°C. The mixture can be filtered and the solids washed three times with 25 mL of methylene chloride. The solids can be identified by NMR to be 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-1-butane- sulfonylamino)-acetic acid benzyl ester. The 3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-1 -butane sulfonylamino)-acetic acid benzyl ester (1.0 grams) can be dissolved in 10 mL of ethanol in a 250 mL Parr bottle. Palladium on carbon (10% (wt/wt), 50% (wt/wt) water Degussa type E101 , 0.2 grams), can be added to the bottle to form a mixture. The bottle can be placed on a Parr shaker at 418 kPaand shaken overnight. The mixture can be sparged with nitrogen and filtered through a thin pad of Celite. The Celite can be rinsed three times with 20 mL of ethanol, and 1.18 mL of an aqueous 2N sodium hydroxide solution added to the combined filtrate and stirred. The filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum and dried to afford 0.803 grams (95.7%) of a
white solid desired product that can be identified as
Figure imgf000063_0001
by NMR.
Figure imgf000064_0001
CH2CI2
Figure imgf000064_0002
According to scheme (39) above, Sarcosine ethyl ester hydrochloride (7.68 grams) can be partitioned between 100 mL of methylene chloride and 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The layers can be separated and the bottom organic layer washed with 200 mL of a 1 :1 solution of 15% (wt/wt) aqueous sodium carbonate and brine. The organic layer can be dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford 5.45 grams (93.0%) of a colorless oil that can be identified as sarcosine ethyl ester by NMR. A solution of 5.45 grams of the sarcosine ethyl ester in 20.0 mL of methylene chloride in a three-necked, 100mL round bottom flask equipped with a stir bar, addition funnel with a nitrogen inlet, and a thermocouple, can be chilled to 0°C-5°C in an ice bath. A solution of 6.91 grams of the 3,4,4,4-tetrafluro-3-trifluoromethyl butane-1 -sulfonyl chloride, described above, in 20.0 mL of methylene chloride can be added, drop-wise under nitrogen, at such a rate as to keep the reaction temperature <5°C, (45 min., Tmax=2.1 °C) to form a mixture. The mixture can be stirred for 3 hours. <5°C,
Figure imgf000064_0003
and washed two times with 20 mL of 5% (wt/wt) aqueous HCl solution and once with brine. The organic layer can be recovered, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 7.78 grams of a light yellow oil that can be placed on a Kugelrohr and heated to 50°C, 0.01 Torr to remove the low boiling impurities and identified as [Methyl-(3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl- butane-1 -sulfonyl)-amino]-acetic ethyl ester (>96%) by NMR. A solution of 6.8 grams of the [Methyl-(3,4,4,4-tetrafluoro-3-trifluoromethyl-butane-1- sulfonyl)-amino]-acetic ethyl ester in 25.0 mL of ethanol in a single necked, 100mL round bottom flask can be treated with one equivalent of 2N sodium hydroxide (9.0mL) to form a mixture. The mixture can be stirred at room temperature overnight, concentrated under vacuum, and placed on a Kugelrohr at 50°C, 0.01 Torr for 30 min. to afford 6.21 grams
Figure imgf000065_0001
4-(3 -
Figure imgf000065_0002
In accordance with scheme (40) above, a solution of
Figure imgf000065_0003
(876 grams), prepared according to scheme (24) above, and potassium thiocyanate (255 grams) can be dissolved in ethanol (880mL) and acetic acid (35mL) and heated to reflux and then refluxed for about 2.5 hours to form a heterogeneous mixture that can be cooled to room temperature and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow semi-solid. The semi-solid can be partitioned between methylene chloride (1 L) and deionzied water (1 L). The aqueous phase can be extracted with methylene chloride (500mL) and the organic layers combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow oil. The yellow oil can be placed briefly on the Kugelrohr at room temperature and 0.1 Torr to afford
828.3 grams (99.3%) of 97%
Figure imgf000065_0004
by NMR.
Figure imgf000065_0005
(828.3 grams) can be dissolved in acetic acid (828mL) to form a mixture. The mixture can be treated with 33mL deionized water and sparged with chlorine and heated to 40°C overnight with additional treatments of water. The temperature of the mixture can be increased to 50°C and can be continued to be heated with a chlorine sparge for additional days to achieve approximately 80% completion. The mixture can be cooled to room temperature and quenched using methylene chloride (2L) and deionized water (2L). The organic layer can be washed three times with deionized water (1 L each). The organic layer can be then dried over magnesium sulfate overnight. The dried organic layer can be filtered and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil (862.4 grams), and the oil can be dissolved in acetic acid (850mL) to form a mixture. This mixture can be heated to 50°C with a chlorine sparge, and deionized water (33mL) can be added once the reaction reaches 50°C. The mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature and quenched using methylene chloride (2L) and deionized water (1 L). The organic layer can be washed three times with deionized water (1 L each) and then dried over magnesium sulfate overnight. The dried organic layer can be filtered and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil (859.6 grams, 95.4%) NMR and gas chromatography analysis can indicate
(97%, area percent)
Figure imgf000066_0001
Dimethylaminopropylamine (568mL) and chloroform (4L) can be combined to form
a mixture and cooled to 0°C using an ice/acetone bath and (839 grams) can be dissolved in chloroform (4L) and added drop-wise to the mixture over four hours to keep the mixture at temperature <0°C. The reaction can be completed an hour after the drop-wise addition to form a yellow solution. The homogeneous yellow reaction solution can be washed with saturated bicarbonate (8L), deionized water (8L), and brine (8L) and the organic layer dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuum to a white solid. The white solid can be dried for one hour under vacuum at 35°C to afford
899.7 (95.2%, area percent) of
Figure imgf000066_0003
by NMR. The
Figure imgf000067_0001
(600 grams) can be dissolved in ethanol (820mL) and water (130mL) with 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (241 mL) to form a mixture and heated to 35°C. An exotherm with a tmax=49.3°C can be observed. The reaction can be complete an hour after heating the mixture as determined by NMR analysis, however, by LC/MS analysis a trace amount of starting material can be observed. The mixture can be heated again at 35°C for two hours to complete the reaction. Decolorizing carbon (135 grams) and ethanol (820mL) can be added to the mixture portion-wise and the mixture heated to 50°C. An exotherm can be observed. The mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction can be tested for peroxide using Kl starch test strips, and if positive, the mixture can be heated to 50°C for 1.5 hours or until negative. The mixture can then be filtered through celite and the celite pad washed using 1 L ethanol. The filtrate can be concentrated to a white solid and the white solid placed on the Kugelrohr for 30 minutes at 0.1 Torr and 50°C. The white solid can then be dried under vacuum at 50°C for four hours to afford 593.8 grams (96.6%) of 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2- trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6-trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonyl amine by NMR and/or LC/MS. The 6,7,7,7-Tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6- trifluoromethyl-heptane-1-sulfonyl amine (319 grams), ethanol (1290 mL), and sodium chloroacetate (63.5 grams) can be combined to form a mixture and the mixture brought to reflux for 48 hours. After 48 hours, NMR analysis can indicate that no starting material is present, however, LC/MS analysis may indicate product ions. The mixture can be filtered and the filter cake washed with ethanol (1 L). The filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum to an orange foam and the orange foam placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 50°C for one hour. The orange foam like solid can be dried overnight under vacuum at 50°C to afford
344.4 grams (98.2%) of
Figure imgf000067_0002
as demonstrated by NMR.
Figure imgf000068_0001
In accordance with scheme (41 ) above, 6,7,7,7-Tetrafluoro-4- (2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6-trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 - sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.2 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.23 grams of sodium chloroacetate to form a solution. The solution can be heated to reflux and allowed to reflux overnight. After refluxing for approximately 2 days, the solution can be quenched, filtered, and the filtrate stripped of solvent overnight in a vacuum (50 °C, 1 Torr). The
remaining solids can be identified as
Figure imgf000068_0002
by NMR.
Figure imgf000069_0001
Referring to scheme (42) above, a solution of the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3- tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6-trifluoromethyl heptane-1 -sulfonyl chloride (25 grams), described above, in 125mL dichloromethane can be added to a cooled solution (0 °C-5°C) of ethanolamine (17.6 grams) in dichloromethane (125mL) drop-wise to form a mixture. The mixture can be agitated, allowed to warm to room temperature, and diluted with dichloromethane (250mL). The diluted mixture can be washed with deionized water (250mL), 5% (wt/wt) HCl (250 L), and saturated bicarbonate solution (250mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6- trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (2-hydroxy-ethyl)-amide (5.0 grams) with residual dichloromethane and ethanolamine by NMR analysis. A solution of the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4-(2,3,3,3-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl-propyl)-6- trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (2-hydroxy-ethyl)-amide (5.0 grams) and 2-chloro-[1 ,3,2] dioxaphospholane-2-oxide (0.87 mL) can be dissolved in anhydrous ether (30mL) and cooled to 0°C using an ice/water bath. Triethylamine (0.55 mL) can be added drop-wise to the solution to form a white precipitate. The solution can be allowed to warm to room temperature, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum. The reaction can appear to be decomposing after 6 hours. The bulk solution can be filtered and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow oil (3.3 grams) that can be indentified as
Figure imgf000070_0001
t3πι lie
Figure imgf000070_0002
In accordance with scheme (43) above, 5-bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2-trifluoromethyl- pentane (25 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol and 0.2 mL of acetic acid, and 10.9 grams of potassium thiocyanate can be added to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to reflux and cooled to room temperature after about 1 to 2.5 hours, and concentrated under vacuum. The concentrate can be partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and water (50mL). The aqueous phase can be extracted with methylene chloride (50mL), the organic layers combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro- 5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane (21.7 grams, 93.9%) by NMR analysis. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane can be dissolved in 1 0 mL of acetic acid and 0.4 mL of water, heated to 40°C and sparged with chlorine. Three additional water (.4mL) treatments can be added every 2 hours with a slight temperature exotherm noted after each addition. The mixture can be sparged and additional water treatments added for a couple of days to result in a heterogenous mixture. The heterogeneous mixture can be partitioned between methylene chloride (1 00mL) and water (25 mL), the organic layer dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum. NMR analysis can indicate 7.1 grams (74.1 %) of 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- trifluoromethyl-pentanesulfonyl chloride. The 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-pentanesulfonyl chloride (7.1 grams) can be dissolved in 40 mL of chloroform and added to a solution of 8.6 mL of 3-dimethylaminopropylamine in 40 mL of chloroform at 0 °C-5°C drop-wise over 45 minutes (Tmax=5°C) to form a mixture. The mixture can be washed successively with saturated bicarbonate solution (80 mL), water (80 mL), and brine (80mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 8 grams (93%) of 4,5, 5,5-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide by NMR and LC/MS analysis. The 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl-pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (8 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 3 mL of water and 5.1 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and the resulting solution heated at 35°C for 30 minutes. The reaction can then be allowed to cool to room temperature overnight. Norit, a decolorizing carbon (10 grams) and ethanol (20mL) can be added and the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours. The mixture can be filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/ 10% (wt/wt) water (60 mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum, distilled with methanol, and Kugelrohr
to afford 7.1 grams (89.9%) of
Figure imgf000071_0001
by NMR and LCMS analysis.
Figure imgf000071_0002
In accordance with scheme (44) above, 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-trifluoromethyl- pentane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.0 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.9 grams of sodium chloroacetate. The resulting solution can be heated to reflux and allowed to reflux for two consecutive nights. After refluxing for approximately 45 hours, the reaction can be stopped, filtered, the salts rinsed and discarded and the filtrate stripped of solvent and identified as
Figure imgf000071_0003
(3.6 grams) by NMR.
Figure imgf000072_0001
In accordance with scheme (45) above, 8-Bromo-1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-2- trifluoromethyl-octane (20 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL of ethanol containing 7.6 grams of potassium thiocyanate. Acetic acid (0.2 mL) can be added to form a mixture and the mixture heated to reflux for 4 hours. The mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature overnight, concentrated under vacuum, and partitioned between methylene chloride (200 mL) and water (100 mL). The organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 18.2 grams (97%) 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-8- thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-octane by NMR analysis. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-8-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-octane (18.2 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of acetic acid to form a mixture and the mixture heated to 40°C with chlorine sparging. Initially, 0.8 mL of water can be added to the mixture. Three additional water treatments (0.8mL/each) can be added to the mixture every 2 hours and heated with the chlorine sparge continued overnight and an additional 0.8mL of water added, the mixture can be cooled and partitioned between methylene chloride (200mL) and water (100mL). The aqueous layer can be extracted with methylene chloride (100mL). The organic layers can be combined, washed three times with water (100mL/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to yield 19.5 grams (94.5%) of 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octanesulfonyl chloride by NMR analysis.
The 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octanesulfonyl chloride (19.5 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and added to 20.9 mL of dimethylaminopropylamine in 100 mL of chloroform at 0 °C-5°C over 1 hour to form a mixture. When the addition is complete, the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and can be stirred at ambient for one hour. The mixture can be washed twice with saturated bicarbonate solution (l OOmL/each), deionized water (200mL), and brine (200mL). The organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be identified as 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino -propyl)-amide (24.09 grams, 95.97%) by NMR. The 7,8, 8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino- propyl)-amide (7 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 2.3 mL of water and 4.0 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and the resulting solution can be heated at 35°C overnight. Decolorizing carbon (8 grams) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the solution and the solution heated to 50°C for three hours. The solution can then be cooled to room temperature, filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/deionized water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to a wax like solid. The solid can be distilled twice with ethanol to afford a yellow oil that can be placed on a Kugelrohr for two hours at 40°C and 0.1 Torr to afford a white solid (5.9 grams, 79.9%) of
Figure imgf000073_0001
by NMR analysis.
Figure imgf000073_0002
In accordance with scheme (46) above, 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl- octane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.0 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.6 grams of sodium chloroacetate. The resulting solution can be heated to reflux and allowed to reflux and stir over for 40 hours. The solution can be quenched, filtered, the solvent stripped, and the resulting solid placed in a drying oven (50°C, 1 Torr) overnight. The remaining solids can be identified as
Figure imgf000073_0003
Figure imgf000074_0001
In accordance with scheme (47) above, 2-(3-Bromo-propoxy)-1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoro- propane (19 grams) and potassium thiocyanate (8.3 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL of ethanol containing 0.2 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux. After 2.5 hours at reflux, the reaction mixture can be cooled to room temperature and concentrated under vacuum to a semi solid. The semi solid can be partitioned between ether (100mL) and deionized water (100mL). The organic layer can be dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil (16.88 grams, 90.3%). The yellow oil can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-(3-thiocyanato-propoxy)-propane by NMR. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,3,3, 3-hexafluoro-2-(3-thiocyanato-propoxy)-propane (16.9 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL of acetic acid and 0.8 mL of water to form a mixture. The mixture can be heated to 40°C and sparged with chlorine. The mixture can then be treated three times with deionized water (0.8mL) every two hours, and the mixture heated to 40°C under a chlorine sparge for about 48 hours. The mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature, partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer separated and washed three times with deionized water (100mL/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonyl chloride (1 8.4 grams, 99.3%) by NMR. The 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonyl chloride (18.4 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and added to 22.5 mL of dimethylaminopropylamine in 1 00 mL of chloroform at 0 °C-5°C over 1 hour to form a mixture. When the addition is complete the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and stir at ambient for 1 hour. The mixture can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (200 mL), deionzied water (200mL), and brine (200mL). The organic layer can be dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow oil that can be placed on the Kugelrohr for 15 minutes at ambient temperature and 0.1 Torr to afford 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 - trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (20.88g (92.8%)) by NMR. The 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)-propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3- dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 2.6 mL of water and 4.4 mL of 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide to form a mixture and the mixture heated at 35°C overnight. Decolorizing carbon (8 grams) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the mixture, the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours, filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol/water (50mL) and the filtrate can be concentrated under vacuum to afford a white semi-solid. The solid can be refluxed twice in ethanol prior to being placed on the Kugelrohr for 1 hour at 40°C and 0.1 Torr to afford
Figure imgf000075_0001
In accordance with scheme (48) above, 3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -trifluoromethyl-ethoxy)- propane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (6.0 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of ethanol containing 1.9 grams of sodium chloroacetate. The resulting solution can be refluxed and stirred for 40 hours, the reaction quenched, and filtered. The solvent can be stripped and the resulting solid placed in a drying oven (50 °C, 1 Torr) overnight to
yield
Figure imgf000075_0002
by NMR.
Figure imgf000076_0001
In accordance with scheme (49) above, a solution of 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzyl bromide (25g) and 11.9 grams of potassium thiocyanate can be dissolved in 40 mL of ethanol and 0.2 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux, allowed to reflux for 3 hours, cooled to room temperature, and concentrated under vacuum to yield a white solid. The solid can be partitioned between ether (150mL) and deionized water (150mL). The organic layer can be dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane
(23.1 grams, 98.8%) NMR analysis. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane (23.1 grams) can be dissolved in 33 mL acetic and heated to 40°C with chlorine sparging overnight to yield a white precipitate. The heterogeneous mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature, partitioned between deionized water (150mL) and methylene chloride (150mL). The organic layer can be washed three times with deionized water (100mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a white solid that can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 40°C for 30 minutes. NMR analysis can indicate 3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (18.52 grams, 70.1%). The 3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (18.5 grams) can be dissolved in 100 mL of chloroform and cooled to 0 °C-5°C, then 20 mL of 3-dimethylaminopropylamine can be added in 100 mL of chloroform drop-wise over 1 hour. The mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature and stir at ambient temperature for 3 hours. The reaction can then be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (200mL), deionized water (200mL), and brine (200mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to a yellow solid (20.0 grams). NMR analysis can indicate the yellow oil is 1 :1 mono and bis sulfonyl amine products.
Figure imgf000077_0001
Referring to scheme (50) above, the mono and bis sulfonyl amine starting material (10 grams) can be dissolved in 30 mL ethanol, deionized water (3.7 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (4.7 mL). The heterogeneous mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature over 2 days and decolorizing carbon (7 grams) and ethanol (15mL) added to the mixture. The mixture can be stirred over 2 days at room temperature, monitored for peroxide, the bulk reaction filtered through celite, the filter cake washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow solid (7.07 grams). The yellow solid can be identified as 1 :1 mono/bis product by NMR and/or LC/MS analysis.
Figure imgf000078_0001
Referring to scheme (51 ) above, a solution of 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzyl bromide (25 grams) and 11.9 grams of potassium thiocyanate can be suspended in 40 mL of ethanol and 0.2 mL of acetic acid and heated to reflux, refluxed for 3 hours, allowed to cool to room temperature, and then concentrated under vacuum to afford a white solid. The white solid can be partitioned between ether (100mL) and deionized water (100mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl- pentane (22.58 grams, 96.6%), that can be identified by NMR. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-5-thiocyanato-2-trifluoromethyl-pentane (22.5 grams) can be dissolved in 32 mL acetic acid and heated to 50°C with chlorine sparging overnight. The reaction mixture can be allowed to cool to room temperature, partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer washed thrice with deionized water (100mL/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to yield a white solid of 3,5-bis-trifluoromehtyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (22.94 grams, 89.1%) that can be determined by NMR. The 3,5-bis-trifluoromehtyl phenyl)-methanesulfonyl chloride (5 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL of chloroform and added to a cooled (0 °C-5°C) solution of 4.4 mL of 3- dimethylaminopropylamine in 25 mL of chloroform drop-wise over 1 hour, then allowed to warm to room temperature after the addition is complete. The homogeneous solution can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (50mL), deionized water (50mL), and brine (50mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford a yellow solid (5.26 grams, 87.7%), that can be determined by NMR analysis to be 90% C-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide with the impurity being the bis addition compound.
Figure imgf000079_0001
Referring to scheme (52) above, the C-(3,5-Bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide (6 grams) can be dissolved in 20 mL ethanol, deionized water (2.2 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (3.6 mL), and the heterogeneous mixture allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. The mixture can then be cooled, decolorizing carbon (5 grams) and ethanol (15mL) added, heated to 50°C for 2 hours, monitored for peroxide, cooled to room temperature, and filtered through celite. The filter cake can be washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, 10% (wt/wt) water (50mL), and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford C-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide by NMR analysis.
Figure imgf000079_0002
EtOH
Referring to scheme (53) above, the C-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-N-(3- dimethylamino-propyl)-methanesulfonamide (2 grams) can be dissolved in ethanol (20 mL), and sodium chloroacetate (0.59 grams) and refluxed overnight, the reaction allowed to cool to room temperature, filtered, and the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to a white solid. The white solid can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 50°C for 1 hour to afford 2.1 grams (91.3%) by NMR analysis.
Figure imgf000079_0003
Referring to scheme (54) above, a solution of polyethylene glycol (PEG) (12.01 grams) in THF (70 mL) can be cooled (0°C) in a nitrogen atmosphere and lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (33.0 mL) added to form a mixture. The mixture can be allowed to
stir for 15 minutes at 0°C. The RF-intermediate
Figure imgf000080_0001
can be then placed in THF (70 mL) and added drop-wise to the mixture. The mixture can be allowed to stir at 0°C for 30 minutes, then allowed to warm to room temperature and stir for an hour.
The mixture can then be heated to 40°C and allowed to stir overnight to form a clear light tan solution, which can have a small amount of suspended solid matter, that can be acidified with HCl (5% (wt/wt), 135 mL) until pH=3. The solids can be dissolved into solution at pH=9 and the mixture turned a clear yellow. The biphasic solution can be separated, the aqueous layer set aside, the organic layer dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and stripped of solvent. The resulting yellow oil can be placed on the Kugelrohr (40°C, 0.1 Torr, 15 minutes) to remove residual solvent. 1HNMR analysis of the heterogeneous yellow oil (8.1 grams) can be identified as a mixture of starting material and PEG, not desired product, as the LC/MS can suggest. The yellow oil can be distilled on the Kugelrohr and the remains determined to be desired product (1.8 grams) by NMR and/or LC/MS.
xide
Figure imgf000080_0002
+ others (55)
Referring to scheme (55) above, the RF-intermediate
Figure imgf000080_0003
can be combined with thiourea (0.68 grams) in ethanol (25 mL) and heated to reflux overnight. After 22 hours of refluxing, the reaction system can be dismantled, the ethanol stripped, and the remaining oil placed on the Kugelrohr (0.01 mmHg, 20 min, 60°C) which can yield 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane- -thiol (3.4 grams) that can be determined by NMR and/or LC/MS analysis. > The 7,8,8,8-tetrafluoro-7-trifluoromethyl-octane-1 -thiol can be placed in a flask and cooled to 0°C and NaH (0.08 grams) added to form a mixture. The mixture can be cooled to -78°C, flushed with nitrogen, condensed in ethylene oxide (1.6 grams), and allowed to warm to room temperature, then placed in a 65°C oil bath overnight. Ethyl acetate (20 mL) and HCl (1 N, 10 mL) can be added to the mixture, the layers separated, the aqueous layer extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL, 5 times). All organic layers can be combined, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, stripped of solvent and the resulting brown oil (2.2 grams) characterized LC/MS analysis.
H
Figure imgf000081_0001
Referring to scheme (56) above, a solution of the RF-intermediate
Figure imgf000081_0002
potassium thiocyanate (8.7 grams), ethanol (40mL), and acetic acid (0.2mL) can be combined and brought to reflux, refluxed for 3 hours, and the heterogeneous mixture allowed to cool to room temperature and concentrated under vacuum to yield a white/yellow semi-solid. The semi-solid can be partitioned between ether (100mL) and deionized water (100mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil (21.19 grams, 97.2%) that can be identified as 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-7-thiocyanato-2,4- bistrifluoromethyl-heptane (>95% pure) by NMR and gas chromatography analysis. The 1 ,1 ,1 ,2-tetrafluoro-7-thiocyanato-2,4-bistrifluoromethyl-heptane can be dissolved in 30 mL acetic acid and heated to 40°C with chlorine sparging overnight. The temperature of the mixture can be increased to 50 °C for 6 hours and allowed to cool to room temperature. The mixture can be partitioned between methylene chloride (100mL) and deionized water (100mL), the organic layer can be separated, washed thrice with deionized water (100ml_/each), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to a colorless oil. The oil can be placed on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 40°C for 30 minutes to afford a yellow oil (13.4 grams, 57.3%) that can be identified by NMR and gas chromatography analysis to be indicated >94% 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptanesulfonyl chloride. Dimethylaminopropyl amine (11.6mL) can be dissolved in chloroform (75mL) and cooled to 0°C. The 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl-heptanesulfonyl chloride (13.4 grams) can be dissolved in chloroform (75mL) and added drop-wise to the cooled solution to form a mixture. Once the addition is complete, the mixture can be allowed to warm to room temperature, and can be washed with saturated bicarbonate solution (150mL), deionized water (150mL), and brine (150mL). The organic layer can be separated, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil (14.94 grams, 96.0%). The orange oil can be found to be
6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl-heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)- amide by NMR analysis.
Figure imgf000082_0001
Referring to scheme (57) above, the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7.5 grams) can be dissolved in 25 mL ethanol, deionized water (30 mL) and 50% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide (3.7 mL). The homogeneous mixture can be allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. Decolorizing carbon (5g) and ethanol (15mL) can be added to the mixture and the mixture heated to 50°C for 2.5 hrs while monitoring for peroxide. The reaction mixture can then be cooled to room temperature and filtered through celite. The filter cake can be washed with 90% (wt/wt) ethanol, 10% (wt/wt) water (50mL), the filtrate concentrated under vacuum and the resulting
oil identified as
Figure imgf000082_0002
by NMR.
Figure imgf000083_0001
Referring to scheme (58) above, the 6,7,7,7-tetrafluoro-4,6-bis-trifluoromethyl- heptane-1 -sulfonic acid (3-dimethylamino-propyl)-amide (7.5 grams) can be dissolved in ethanol (40mL), and sodium chloroacetate (1.85 grams) to form a mixture. The mixture can be refluxed overnight. The heterogeneous mixture can be cooled to room temperature and filtered, the filtrate concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil. The orange oil can be dried on the Kugelrohr at 0.1 Torr and 50°C for one hour to afford an amber solid (7.85 grams, 93.1 %). The amber solid can identified as
Figure imgf000083_0002
by NMR analysis. According to another embodiment, a mercaptan RF-intermediate may also be produced by reacting a iodine RF-intermediate with thiourea to make the isothiuronium salt and treating the isothiuronium salt with sodium hydroxide to give the mercaptan RF-intermediate plus sodium iodide, as described in U.S. patent 3,544,663 herein incorporated by reference. In an exemplary aspect of the disclosure, the mercaptan
RF-intermediate may be attached to a Qs portion such as group 2-acrylamido-2-methyl-1 propane sulfonic acid available from Lubrizol as AMPS 2403, as generally described in U.S. patent 4,000,1 88 herein incorporated by reference. Aminoxides of the RF-surfactants can be produced according to processes that include those generally described in U.S. patent 4,983,769, herein incorporated by reference. Accordingly, sulfoamidoamines can be combined with ethanol and water and 70% (wt/wt) hydrogen peroxide and heated to at least 35°C for 24 hours. Activated carbon can then be added and the mixture and refluxed for about 2 hours. The reaction mixture can be filtered and the filtrate evaporated to dryness to provide the aminoxide of the RF-surfactant. In accordance with another embodiment of the disclosure, processes are provided that can be used to alter the surface tension of a part of a system having at least two parts. The system can include liquid/solid systems, liquid/gas systems, gas/solid systems, and/or liquid/liquid systems. In an exemplary embodiment, the liquid/liquid systems can have one part that includes water and another part that includes a liquid that is relatively hydrophobic when compared to water. According to another example, the liquid/liquid system can contain one part that is relatively hydrophobic when compared to water and/or relatively hydrophobic when compared to another part of the system. RF-surfactants can be used to alter the surface tension of a part of the system, for example, by adding the
RF-surfactant to the system. Rp-surfactants may be used as relatively pure solutions or as mixtures with other components. For example, and by way of example only, the Rp- surfactants can be added to a system and the surface tension of the system determined by the Wilhelmy plate method and/or using the Kruss Tensiometer method. The surface tensions of solutions of -B-
Figure imgf000084_0001
according to the concentrations in Plot #1 below. Surface Tensfeft Plot # 1
Figure imgf000085_0001
0.5 15 2 2.5 3 35 4 45 5,5 Θ-S % (wi wt) in deionized water - Suronamide solids - Betaiπiza&on solids
As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000085_0002
at pH 7" and pH 5 various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #2 below. Surface Tension Plot #2
Figure imgf000085_0003
0.5 .5 7 ? fi 3 3 5 4.5 5.5 % (wt/wt) in deionized water
As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000085_0004
at various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in the Plot #3 below. Surface Tens ion Plot #3 46 44 42 £ 40 % 38 36 o 'v> 34 c. CD 1- 32 30 28 C326 24 22 20
Figure imgf000086_0003
0.00 0.50 1.00 1 .50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water
As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000086_0001
at pH 6.8" and pH 4.0 ~a~ can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #4 below.
Surface Tension Plot #4
Figure imgf000086_0002
0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 350 4.00 4.50 5.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000087_0001
at various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #5 below. Surface Tension Plot #5
Figure imgf000087_0002
0.00 0.50 1.00 1 .50 2.00 2.50 3.00 350 4.00 4.50 5.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water
As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000087_0003
at various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #6 below.
Surface Tension Plot #6
Figure imgf000087_0004
0 .00 0.50 1.00 1 .50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 SD0 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000088_0001
at various concentrations can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #7 below.
Surface Tension Plot #7
Figure imgf000088_0002
0.00 0.50 1 .00 1 .50 2.00 2.50 3.00 350 4.00 4.50 5.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water
As another example, the surface tensions of
Figure imgf000088_0003
at pH 6.2-6.8-*- and pH 5.0 -*- can be determined and the data as indicated in Plot #8 below.
Surface Tension Plot #8
Figure imgf000089_0001
0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 350 4.00 4.50 5.00 % (wt wt) in deionized water
Surface tensions and corresponding concentrations of RF-surfactants are denoted in Table 6 below.
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
RF-surfactants described above may be incorporated into detergents, emulsifiers, paints, adhesives, inks, wetting agents, foamers, and/or defoamers, for example. RF-surfactants can be incorporated into AFFF formulations and these formulations can be used as fire-fighting foams, to prevent, and/or extinguish combustion. An exemplary use of AFFFs that include an
RF-surfactant includes the addition of the AFFF to high pressure misting systems, the misting systems being used to prevent and/or extinguish combustion. AFFF formulations can be provided to a substrate, for example. The substrate can include liquid and/or solid compositions. The AFFF formulations can also be dispersed into an atmosphere including gaseous atmospheres, such air to prevent and/or extinguish combustion. The formulations can include other components such as water soluble solvents. These solvents may facilitate the solubilization of the RF-surfactants and other surfactants. These solvents can also act as foam stabilizers and/or freeze protection agents. Exemplary solvents include ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, glycerol, ethyl Cellusolve®, butyl Carbitol®, Dowanol DPM®, Dowanol TPM®, Dowanol PTB®, propylene glycol, and/or hexylene glycol. Additional components to the formulation, such as polymeric stabilizers and thickeners, can be incorporated into the formulation to enhance the foam stability property of a foam produced from aeration of the aqueous solution of the formulation. Exemplary polymeric stabilizers and thickeners include partially hydrolyzed protein, starches, polyvinyl resins such as polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylamides, carboxyvinyl polymers, and/or poly(oxyethylene)glycol. Polysaccharide resins, such as xanthan gum, can be included in the formulation as a foam stabilizer in formulations for use in preventing or extinguishing polar solvent combustion, such as alcohol, ketone, and/or ether combustion, for example. The formulation can also include a buffer to regulate the pH of the formulation, for example, tris(2-hydroxyethyl) amine or sodium acetate, and a corrosion inhibitor such as toluoltriazole or sodium nitrite may be included. Water soluble electrolytes such as magnesium sulphate may be included and can improve film-spreading characteristics of the formulation. For example and by way of example only, the following formulations can be prepared using RF-surfactants. Formulations recited in the following tables can be prepared and applied to the indicated substrates.
Figure imgf000097_0001
A 3% (wt/wt) premixed solution of formulation #1 in water from Table 7 above can be used to film on the substrate heptane.
Figure imgf000098_0001
A 3% (wt/wt) premixed solution of formulation #2 in water from Table 8 above can be used to film on the substrate heptane.
Figure imgf000098_0002
A third formulation including 3% (wt/wt) of the mix formulation of Table 9 above
and 0.15% (wt/wt) of
Figure imgf000099_0001
can form film on the substrates heptane and cyclohexane. A fourth formulation including 3% (wt/wt) of the mix formulation of Table 9 above
and 0.15 % (wt/wt) of
Figure imgf000099_0002
can form film on the substrates heptane and cyclohexane.
Figure imgf000100_0001
Formulations 5 and 6 of Table 10 above can be used at 3% (wt/wt) concentrations to generate foam and film over the substrate heptane. The RF- surfactants can also be useful in formulations that include other surfactants such as alkyl sulfate, alkylethersulfates, alphaolefinsulfonates, alkyl sulfobetaines, alkyl polyglycerides, alkylamidopropylbetaines, alkylimidazolinedicarboxylat.es, 2-alkylthiopropionamido-2 methyl- propanesulfonoic acid sodium salt, alkyliminodipropinates, alkylsulfonates, ethoxylated alkylphenols, dialkylsulfosuccinates, and/or alkyltrimethyl ammonium chloride. A variation of AFFF, ARAFFF, an acronym for Alcohol Resistant Aqueous
Film Forming Foam(s), can be used to extinguish hydrocarbon fires in much the same manner that AFFF foams are used and may also be used to extinguish fires involving water soluble solvents such as acetone and isopropanol which conventional AFFF foams will not extinguish. ARAFFF formulations can contain the same ingredients as conventional AFFF formulations plus a polysaccharide such as xanthan gum and, in some formulations, a polymeric foam stabilizer. Polymeric foam stabilizers are offered by DuPont® and Dynax®, Inc. An exemplary DuPont product, Forafac® 1268, is a water soluble acrylic polymer. An exemplary Dynax product, DX5011 ®, is an ethyleneimine polymer. Xanthan gum is offered by several suppliers, including Kelco CP (Kelzan) and Rhodia North America (Rhodopol). Polysaccharide alone can be sufficient to make ARAFFF formulations alcohol resistant, but the amount required produces a foam concentrate that can be quite viscous. The use of a polymeric foam stabilizer can permit a reduction in the amount of polysaccharide required to give useful alcohol resistance. Because of the possibility of microbial attack on polysaccharide solutions, ARAFFF concentrates can contain an effective amount of a biocide such as Kathon CG ICP, manufactured by Rohm & Haas. Many other biocides such as Acticide, Nipacide and Dowicil can also be effective. Some ARAFFF formulations can be designed to be proportioned at different percentages depending on whether the substrate to be extinguished is a hydrocarbon or an alcohol type substrate, for example. Alcohol type can include any fuel having a hydroxyl group. Exemplary ARAFFF formulations (3% (wt/wt) x 3% (wt/wt)) utilizing the RF surfactants are described in Tables 11 -14 as follows. In all cases described in Tables 11 -14, water is balance of formulation.
Figure imgf000102_0002
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000102_0003
Figure imgf000103_0002
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000103_0003
Foam stabilizers, such as Rp-stabilizers that include RF groups described above, for example, can be prepared. Rp-stabilizers can include RF- QFS compositions. QFS can include portions that have a greater hydrophilic character than RF. Exemplary RF-Foam Stabilizers include, but are not limited to those in Table 15 below.
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
For example and by way of example only,
Figure imgf000108_0001
can be a Qps portion. RF stabilizers can be prepared according to scheme (59) below.
Figure imgf000108_0002
llltkniππrih itpπlaπi
Figure imgf000108_0003
Referring to scheme (59) above, potassium carbonate (2.37 grams), methioglycolate (1 .82 grams) and dimethylformamide (DMF) (20mL) can be added and the mixture heated to 50°C for 3 hours. The mixture can be allowed to stir overnight at room temperature to form a yellow slurry which can be added to water (50mL) and ethyl acetate (50mL), the organic layers combined, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and stripped of solvent. In a nitrogen atmosphere, thioester (4.0 grams) and polyethylenimine (PEI, mw=1200) (5.3 grams) can be placed in isopropanol (5mL) and stirred until dissolved to form a mixture. Sodium methoxide (0.15 grams) and sodium borohydride (0.04 grams) can be added to the mixture and the mixture heated to 115°C for 15 hours, then stirred at room temperature for 2 days. Removal of remaining isopropanal can be difficult. A solution of sodium chloroacetate (10.52 grams) in water (25mL) can be added drop-wise to the mixture and the temperature kept below 55°C and the mixture then heated to 70°C for two hours. NaOH (1.23 grams of a 50% (wt/wt) solution of NaOH and water) can be added to raise the pH of the mixture to at least 7.5 from the starting pH of approximately 6. The mixture can then be allowed to continue stirring at 70°C for 2 additional hours, the heat then removed,
Figure imgf000108_0004
characterized ( HNMR analysis). The produced can be compared with other foam stabilizers in accordance with Tables 16-19 below.
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000109_0002
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000110_0002
RF-metal complexes such as RF-Q c incorporating the RF portions are also provided. The RF portions can be incorporated as acid halides or carboxylic acids, for example, with the acid halide including, but not limited to, acid fluorides, for example. RF-metal complexes can include RF-intermediates and, as such, Qg can be interchangeable with QMC- QMC can include the portion of a ligand of a metal complex that is coordinated with the complexed metal, for example. Exemplary RF-metal complexes include, but are not limited to, those in Table 20 below.
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0001
An exemplary method for preparing the RF-metal complexes includes reacting the RF-intermediate having halogen functionality, such as Qg is I, disclosed above, with fuming sulfuric acid to produce an RF-intermediate having acid fluoride functionality, for example. RF-metal complexes can be prepared with reference to scheme (60) below.
Figure imgf000115_0001
An acid fluoride RF-intermediate can be reacted with an amino acid such as glycine to produce an amine ester. The amine ester may then be reacted with chromic chloride in an alcohol such as methanol or isopropanol to produce an exemplary RF-metal complex such as a RF chrome complex. Exemplary acid RF-intermediates for use in preparation of RF.metal complexes can include ethylene carboxylic acid RF-intermediates and/or mixtures of ethylene carboxylic acid RF-intermediates and carboxylic acid RF-intermediates. Exemplary preparations can be performed in accordance with U.S. Patents 3,351 ,643, 3,574,518, 3,907,576, 6,525,127, and 6,294,107, herein incorporated by reference. RF-metal complexes can include a ligand having a RF portion and a QMC portion associated with the metal of the complex. In exemplary embodiments the QMc portion can have a greater affinity for the metal of the complex than the RF portion. RF-metal complexes can be used to treat substrates such as paper, leather, textiles, yarns, fabrics, glass, ceramic products, and/or metals. In some cases treating substrates with the complexes render the substrates less permeable to water and/or oil. An embodiment of the present invention also provides for incorporation of the RF portions into phosphate esters which, in exemplary embodiments, can be used to treat substrates and/or be used as dispersing agents during the preparation of polymers. Exemplary RF-phosphate esters include RF-QPE, with the QPE portion being the phosphate portion of the Rp-composition. RF-phosphate esters, include, but are not limited to, those in Table 21 below.
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
M ω
'1
Figure imgf000117_0002
Figure imgf000118_0001
Exemplary RF-phosphate esters can be prepared with reference to schemes (61 ) and (62) below. p2o5 (61) or POCI3
RF-OH ► (RF0)3.zPO(OM)z M ' Referring to scheme (61 ) above, a RF-intermediate having hydroxyl functionality (Qg=OH) can be obtained by reacting iodine RF-intermediates (Qg= I) with a strong base such as KOH. The iodine RF-intermediate can be reacted with P2O5 or POCI3 in the presence of a metal (M) to yield an exemplary RF- phosphate ester or RF-pyrophosphate in accordance with U.S. Patents 2,559,749 and 2,597,702, herein incorporated by reference, which generally describe the conversion of hydroxyl compounds to phosphate esters using P2O5 or POCI3 to give partial esters. These reactions can also be carried out in the presence of pyridine as an HCl acceptor. Monoalkyl phosphates can also be prepared by treating phosphorus pentoxide P2O5 with excess moles of hydroxyl RF-intermediate followed by hydrolysis of the resulting
RF-pyrophosphate. The product can then be isolated or precipitated as the ammonium salt by the addition of ammonia to the reaction mixture. Alternatively, a solution of salts of the mixed mono- and di-esters can be prepared by neutralizing a mixture of the acids with aqueous ammonia and amine or alkaline metal hydroxide. RF-dialkyl phosphates can also be prepared as well by a reaction of excess moles of RF-intermediate with phosphorus pentoxide (not shown). Instead of hydrolysis, however the RF-pyrophosphate intermediate can be heated at low pressure. Alternatively, RF-phosphate esters can be prepared and separated by treating hydroxyl RF-intermediate with phosphorus pentoxide, neutralizing the resulting mixed acid phosphate with aqueous ammonia, and amine such as tetraalkyl ammonium base or alkali metal hydroxide to give a solution that can include amine or metal salts of the esters (not shown). Salts of esters can be dissolved in toluene and purged with ammonia to precipitate a mixture of the salts of the corresponding esters. The toluene and unreacted hydroxyl RF-intermediate and by-products, such as the corresponding RF-trialkyl phosphate, can be removed by filtration producing compositions having the general formula RFAOPORp, as described in U.S. Patent 4,145,382, herein incorporated by reference. As used in this general formula, the RF is the RF portion, A is a methylene group or other similar spacer group from the phosphate ester and can be present in amounts as high as 3 and as little as none, and Rp is a corresponding salt to the phosphate including hydrogen alkali metal ammonium or substituted ammonium such as ethanol amine. Rp-phosphates can be used as dispersing agents in the preparation of polymers or they can be diluted and used to treat substrate materials in aqueous bathes, for example, by ordinary means such as padding, dipping, impregnating, spraying, etc. These compositions can be incorporated into or used to treat such materials as textile fabric, textile yarns, leather, paper, plastic, sheeting, wood, ceramic clays, as well as, manufactured articles prepared therefrom such as articles of apparel, wallpaper, paper bags, cardboard boxes, porous earthenware, etc. U.S. Patent 3,112,241 describes methods for treating materials using phosphate esters and is herein incorporated by reference.
Figure imgf000120_0001
Referring again to scheme (62) above, RF-epoxide intermediate and/or RF-diol intermediate can be prepared as generally described in U.S. Patent 3,919,361 which is herein incorporated by reference. RF-epoxide and diol intermediates can be reacted with phosphoric acid to obtain an RF-phosphoric acid ester. RF-phosphoric acid ester can be dissolved in a solution and applied to a substrate such as paper to increase resistance to environmental materials such as oil and water. Rp-phosphoric acid ester can also exist as a salt such as alkyl amines including ethanol amines as described in U.S. Patent 4,145,382, herein incorporated by reference. RF-phosphoric acid ester can be used to treat substrates such as wood pulp products, including paper products such as packaging products including food packaging products. An embodiment includes the RF portions incorporated into glycols, such as RF-glycols, including RF-Qh, with Qh representing the ether portion of the glycol after conjugation or, as hydroxyl functionality before conjugation as the ether. Exemplary RF-glycols include, but are not limited to, those in Table 22 below.
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
RF-glycols can be incorporated into polymers such as urethanes including polyurethane elastomers, films and coatings, for example. RF-glycols can also be converted to phosphoric acids or phosphate esters of those glycols as well. Referring to scheme (63) below, RF portions can be incorporated into glycols.
Figure imgf000125_0001
Methods for preparing glycols are described in U.S. Patent 4,898,981 , U.S. Patent 4,491 ,261 , U.S. Patent 5,091 ,550, and U.S. Patent 5,132,445, all of which are herein incorporated by reference. For example, and by way of example only, a RF-intermediate (Qg=SH) can be reacted with a sulfide diol or 2,6 diox-aspiro (3,3) heptane to produce exemplary
RF-glycols (Qh=H2CH2CSH2CH2 . . .) The RF-glycol can then be used directly or indirectly to prepare a RF condensation product such as polyesters, polyureas, polycarbonates, and polyurethanes. This glycol functionality can also be incorporated into block polymers using RF-glycols. U.S. Patent 5,491 ,261 discloses several other glycols that can benefit from the RF portion of the present invention and is herein incorporated by reference. RF-glycols may also be converted to phosphoric acid functionality or phosphate esters (not shown). U.S. Patent 5,091 ,550, 5,1 32,445, 4,898,981 , and 5,491 ,261 all disclose methods of preparing diols and converting diols to phosphate esters and are herein incorporated by reference. In an exemplary implementation, the diols can be converted to phosphoric acid or phosphate esters by reacting the diols in the presence of phosphoric acid. These compositions can be incorporated into compounds which can act as oil and grease proofing for paper, as well as, soil release agents for textile fibers. According to another embodiment of the present invention oligomers, polymers, copolymers, acrylics, and/or resins, for example, can be prepared that include an RF-monomer unit, such as RF-QMU. The monomer unit portion, QMU> can be a single unit within a complex of units and the monomer unit need not repeat within the complex. In an exemplary embodiment, the monomer unit can be a single unit within the complex or it may be one of many identical units linked together, such as a homopolymer, for example. The complex can also include block polymers and/or polyurethane resins. The RF of the unit can include a pendant group of the monomer unit. The monomer unit may be associated with a complex, perhaps even bonded to the complex, for example, and QMu can include the portion of the monomer unit that is associated with the complex. The complex may be coated onto a substrate or it may be chemically bonded to the substrate. For example, a preparation of RF-intermediates can be provided to the substrate and groups such as hydroxyl groups common to substrates like cotton, may provide sites that allow the Rp-intermediate to chemically bond to the substrate when forming part of, or being associated with a complex. In an exemplary embodiment, QMu can represent the acrylate functionality of an acrylic and RF can be a pendant group from the acrylics chain and/or backbone. Exemplary RF-monomer units include but are not limited to those in Table 23 below.
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0001
In exemplary embodiments oligomers containing a RF-monomer unit can be prepared from RF-monomers. RF-monomers can include RF-intermediates above, but may contain functionality that allows for their conjugation with another monomer, but not necessarily the same RF-monomer. Exemplary Rp- monomers include, but are not limited to those in Table 24 below.
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000133_0001
Referring to scheme (64) below, multiple reactions sequences are shown for the preparation of Rp-monomers having the RF group. (64)
Figure imgf000134_0001
U.S. Patents 3,491 ,169, 3,282,905, 3,497,575, 3,544,663, 6,566,470, 4,147,851 , 4,366,299 and 5,439,998 all relate to the use and preparation of acrylic emulsion polymers that can benefit from the RF groups and, are herein incorporated by reference. Thiol RF-intermediates, iodine RF-intermediates, hydroxyl RF-intermediates, and/or acetate RF-intermediates can be converted to RF-monomers according to scheme (63) above, and these Rp-monomers can be used to prepare a composition containing an RF-monomer unit. For example, and by way of example only, the RF portion can be incorporated into a RF-monomer as described in U.S. Patent 6,566,470. represented as RF-W-X-C(=O)-C(Rι)=CH2, with the RF portion as described above. W can be an alkylene with 1 to 15 carbons, hydroxyalkylene with 3 to 15 carbons, -(CnH2n)(OCmH2m)q-, -SO2NR2-(CnH2n)-, or -CONR2-(CnH2n)-, with n is 1 to 12, m is 2 to 4, q is 1 to 10, and Ri is an alkyl group with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, for example, X can be O, S and/or N(R2), where R2 is as R^ For example, the RF-monomer 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluormethyl)pentyl acrylate can be prepared from the RF-intermediate 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)pent-l -ene in two steps shown below as reaction schemes (65) and (66) respectively.
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000135_0002
Referring to scheme (65) above, a 1 M solution of 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolane in tetrahydrofuran (66.1 grams, 0.075 moles), chlorotris(triphenylphosphine)rhodium (0.37 grams), and tetrahydrofuran (158.8 grams) can be placed in a 500mL three-neck round bottom flask to form a mixture. 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene (18.243, 0.087 moles) can be added to the mixture at room temperature over a 15 minute period, allowed to mix for 72 hours, and monitored by gas chromatography until which time the 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 -ene is substantially consumed (See Table 25 below for monitoring of reaction).
Figure imgf000135_0003
Note: 3.07 minute peak = 4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pent-1 - ene, 9.3 minute peak = 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolane, 16.8 minute peak = 2-(4,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramehtyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan
A 3M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide (7.8 grams) can be added to the mixture via an addition funnel over a 15 minute period after which the mixture can be chilled to 0°C using an ice bath. Hydrogen peroxide (23.6 grams, 35% (wt/wt) aqueous solution) can be added drop-wise over a 15 minute period to the mixture and then the mixture can be washed in H2O (three times). The organic layer can be removed and transferred into a 100mL three- neck round bottom flask and distilled to produce an 85% area percent pure (by gas chromatography 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1-ol.
Figure imgf000136_0001
,5,5,5-tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentyl acrylate The 4,5,5,5-Tetrafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)pentan-1 -ol (2.59 grams, 0.011 moles) and triethylamine (1 .3 grams, 0.013 moles) can be added to a 15mL three-neck RBF to form a mixture. The mixture can be chilled to 0°C using an ice water bath and acryloyl chloride (1 .38 grams, 0.015 moles) can be added to the mixture drop-wise using an addition funnel to the RBF over a 1 5 minute period. After a 1 hour hold period, 10 mL H2O can be added and two phases can be observed. Water can be decanted off the mixture, the organic phase dried over MgSO , and analyzed by gas chromatography/mass spectrometry to confirm a new peak having a mass of 283.
An exemplary RF-QM such as
Figure imgf000136_0002
can be provided in
solution and conjugated and/or polymerized with another
Figure imgf000136_0003
another compound to form a complex, such as an oligomer, that can include
Figure imgf000136_0004
with QMU representing a remainder of the complex. For example and by way of example only, solutions of Rp-monomers can be provided to a substrate and allowed to complex, for example, via evaporating the solvent of the solution to form a complex that includes a RF-monomer unit. Providing these solutions to a substrate such as glass, nylon, and/or cotton and allowing the RF-monomer to become part of a complex, such as coating the substrate. The surface energy of the complex can be determined using the standard
Fowkes method using diiodomethane and water as probe liquids, and the Zisman method of surface energy analysis using octane, decane, tetradecane, and hexadecane as probe liquids. Contact angle of drops of Zisman probe liquids, as well as, the Fowkes probes can be determined, using a Kruss Drop Shape Analysis System. Surface energy data of complexes that include RF-QP monomer units are recited in the following Tables 26-35.
Figure imgf000138_0002
Figure imgf000138_0001
-4
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000140_0001
00
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000142_0001
Figure imgf000143_0001
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000144_0002
Figure imgf000145_0001
Figure imgf000146_0001
Figure imgf000147_0001
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
Figure imgf000151_0002
Figure imgf000152_0001
Figure imgf000152_0002
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000153_0002
Rp-monomers can be incorporated with other monomers and then incorporated into the construction of paper materials or used to treat paper materials. RF-monomers can also be used to prepare polymer solutions.
Polymeric solutions can be diluted to a percentage aqueous or non-aqueous solution and then applied to substrates to be treated, such as paper plates. RF-monomers can also be incorporated into copolymers with comonomers such as the dialkyl amino alkyl acrylate or methacrylate or acrylamide or methacrylamide monomer and its amine salt quaternary ammonium or amine oxide form, as described in U.S. Patent 4,147,851 , herein incorporated by reference. The general formula for RF-monomers can be RFqO2CC(R)=CH2, with R being H or CH3, q being an alkylene of 1 to 15 carbon atoms, hydroxyalkylene of 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or CnH2n(OCqH2q)m-, -SOaNR^CnHan)-, or -CONR^CnHan)-, n is 1 to 15, q is 2 to 4, and m is 1 to 15. Monomers used to form copolymers with acrylates and the RF-monomers include those having amine functionality. These copolymers can be diluted in a solution and applied or incorporated directly into or on substrates to be treated, such as paper. Rp-monomers can also be used to form acrylate polymers or other acrylate monomers consistent with those described in U.S. Patent 4,366,299, herein incorporated by reference. As described, RF-monomers can be incorporated into paper products or applied thereon. Rp-monomers, acrylates and/or acrylics, for example, can be applied to finished carpet or incorporated into the finished carpet fiber before it is woven into carpet. RF-monomers can be applied to carpet by a normal textile finishing process known as padding, in which the carpet is passed through a bath containing the RF-monomer and, for example, latex, water, and/or other additives such as non-rewetting surfaces. The carpet can then be passed through nip rollers to control the rate of the add-on before being dried in a tenter frame. Rp-monomers may also be incorporated into the fiber by reacting the fiber with Rp-intermediates having isocyanate functionality, RF-isocyanate, for example. RF portions can also be incorporated into materials used to treat calcitic and/or siliceous particulate materials. For example, Rp-monomers can be incorporated into a copolymer where the copolymer can either be part of a formulation to treat these materials or used by itself to treat these materials as described in U.S. Patent 6,383,569, herein incorporated by reference. The Rp-monomer can have the general formula RF-Q-A-C(O)-C(R)=CH2 wherein RF is described above, R is H or CH3, A is O, S, or N(R1), wherein RT is H or an alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Q is alkylene of 1 to about 15 carbon atoms, hydroxyalkylene of 3 to about 15 carbon atoms, -(CnH2n)(OCq H2q)m-, -SOz-NR CnHan)--, or
Figure imgf000155_0001
wherein R1 is H or an alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, n is 1 to 15, q is 2 to 4, and m is 1 to 15. Rp-compositions and mixtures containing the RF portion can be used to treat substrates including hard surfaces like construction materials such as brick, stone, wood, concrete, ceramics, tile, glass, stucco, gypsum, drywall, particle board, and chipboard. These compositions and mixtures can be used alone or in combination with penetration assistance such as non-ionic surfactants. These compositions can be applied to the surface of calcitic and/or siliceous architectural construction material by known methods, for example, by soaking, impregnation, emersion, brushing, rolling, or spraying. The compositions can be applied to the surface to be protected by spraying. Suitable spraying equipment is commercially available. Spraying with a compressed air sprayer is an exemplary method of application to the particular substrate. U.S. Patents 6,197,382 and 5,674,961 also describe methods for applying and using polymer solutions and are herein incorporated by reference. In an exemplary process of producing solutions having components with
RF, an Rp-intermediate having a methyl-epoxide functionality may be condensed with a monocarboxylic alkenoic acid to prepare an unsaturated RF-ester (not shown). Exemplary methods for producing these kinds of unsaturated esters are described in U.S. Patent 5,798,415, herein incorporated by reference. Additional esters may be prepared according to U.S. Patent 4,478,975, herein incorporated by reference. Components of these solutions can also include dimethyl amino ethyl methacrylate, and these components can be applied in organic and inorganic solvents, as described in U.S. Patent 6,120,892 herein incorporated by reference. RF-monomers can also be combined with other monomers to produce copolymers or in solutions with amido and sulfur monomers as described by U.S. Patent 5,629,372 herein incorporated by reference. Rp-intermediates having amine functionality can also be reacted with tetrachlorophthalic anhydride using U.S. Patent 4,043,923 as an exemplary reaction scheme (not shown). U.S. Patent 4,043,923 is herein incorporated by reference. The reaction product can be mixed with a carpet cleaning solution to provide soil repellency. Referring to scheme (67) below, urethanes, including RF portions can be prepared from RF-intermediates.
Figure imgf000156_0001
An RF-intermediate (RF-OH) can be combined with hexamethylene diisocyanate polymers (DESMODUR N-100) following the general reaction sequence described in U.S. Patent 5,827,919, herein incorporated by reference, to produce a urethane. Another method for preparing urethanes includes reacting a Rp-intermediate (RF-SCN) with epichlorohydrin to produce a "twin tailed" Rp-intermediate which can be reacted with diisocyanate and/or a urethane prepolymer as described in U.S. patent 4, 113,748, herein incorporated by reference (not shown). Urethanes having the RF group can then be incorporated as an additive to compositions such as latex paint. U.S. Patent 5,827,919 describes methods for utilizing these urethanes and is herein incorporated by reference. RF-urethanes and polyurethanes can be used to treat substrates such as carpet, drapery, upholstery, automotive, awning fabrics, and rainwear. Exemplary RF-urethanes, such as RF-QU, can include, but are not limited to those listed in Table 36 below.
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0001
157 The RF portion can also be complexed as an acid with amine and quaternary ammonium polymers as described in U.S. Patent 6,486,245, herein incorporated by reference (not shown).

Claims

The invention claimed is: 1. A surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
2. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF is hydrophobic relative to Qs.
3. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein Qs is hydrophilic relative to RF.
4. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF is hydrophobic and Qs is hydrophilic.
5. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least one -CH2- group.
6. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least one cyclic group.
7. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least one cyclic group.
8. The surfactant composition of claim 7 wherein the cyclic group comprises an aromatic group.
9. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least one
(CF3)2CF- group.
10. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least three - CF3 groups.
11. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least two (CF3)2CF- groups.
12. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF comprises at least four carbons and one of the four carbons comprises a -CH2- group.
13. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0001
14. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0002
15. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0003
16. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0004
17. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0005
18. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0006
19. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0007
20. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein Rp-Qs is
21. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000162_0008
22. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0001
23. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0002
24. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
25. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0003
26. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0004
27. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0005
28. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
29. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0006
30. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000163_0007
31. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000164_0001
32. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000164_0002
33. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000164_0003
34. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000164_0004
35. The surfactant composition of claim 1 wherein RF-QS is
Figure imgf000164_0005
the X representing a halogen.
36. A detergent comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
37. An emulsifier comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
38. A paint comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
39. An adhesive comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RP has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
40. An ink comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
41. A wetting agent comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
42. A foamer comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant composition comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
43. A defoamer comprising a surfactant composition, the surfactant comprising RF-QS, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
44. A production process comprising: providing a first compound, the first compound comprising at least two -CF3 groups and two hydrogens, a portion of the first compound representing RF of an RF-QS surfactant, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for a first part of a system having at least two parts than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for a second part of the system than RF; and RF comprises the two -CF3 groups and the two hydrogens; and adding Qs to RF to form the RF-QS surfactant.
45. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF is hydrophobic relative to Qs.
46. The production process of claim 44 wherein Qs is hydrophilic relative to RF.
47. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF is hydrophobic and Qs is hydrophilic
48. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least one -CH2- group.
49. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least one cyclic group.
50. The production process of claim 49 wherein the cyclic group comprises an aromatic group.
51. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least one
(CF3)2CF- group.
52. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least three -CF3 groups.
53. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least two (CF3)2CF- groups.
54. The production process of claim 44 wherein RF comprises at least four carbons and one of the four carbons comprises a -CH2- group.
55. A process for altering a surface tension of a part of a system having at least two parts, comprising adding a surfactant composition comprising RF-QS to a portion of the system, wherein: RF has a greater affinity for one part of the system than Qs; Qs has a greater affinity for another part of the system than RF; and RF comprises at least two -CF3 groups and at least two hydrogens.
56. The process of claim 55 wherein RF is hydrophobic relative to Qs.
57. The process of claim 55 wherein Qs is hydrophilic relative to RF.
58. The process of claim 55 wherein RF is hydrophobic and Qs is hydrophilic.
59. The process of claim 55 wherein RF comprises at least one -CH2- group.
60. The process of claim 55 wherein RF comprises at least one cyclic group.
61. The process of claim 60 wherein the cyclic group comprises an aromatic group.
62. The process of claim 55 wherein RF comprises at least one (CF3)2CF- group.
63. The process of claim 55 wherein RF comprises at least three -CF3 groups.
64. The process of claim 55 wherein RF comprises at least two (CF3)2CF- groups.
PCT/US2005/003138 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers WO2005074594A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002554293A CA2554293A1 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
US10/587,444 US7943567B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
EP05712546A EP1718722A4 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
PCT/US2005/003138 WO2005074594A2 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
JP2006551579A JP2007526912A (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Manufacturing method and system, composition, surfactant, monomer unit, metal complex, phosphate ester, glycol, aqueous film-forming foam, and foam stabilizer

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US54061204P 2004-01-30 2004-01-30
US60/540,612 2004-01-30
PCT/US2005/003138 WO2005074594A2 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005074594A2 true WO2005074594A2 (en) 2005-08-18
WO2005074594A3 WO2005074594A3 (en) 2006-03-30

Family

ID=39099663

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/003138 WO2005074594A2 (en) 2004-01-30 2005-01-28 Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US7943567B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1718722A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2007526912A (en)
CA (1) CA2554293A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2005074594A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10494722B1 (en) 2019-04-22 2019-12-03 King Saud University Sulfonamide corrosion inhibitors

Family Cites Families (177)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3172910A (en) 1965-03-09 Ch ) s(ch
US1092141A (en) 1910-05-09 1914-04-07 Westinghouse Air Brake Co Electropneumatic brake apparatus.
US2567011A (en) 1949-01-10 1951-09-04 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Fluorocarbon acids and derivatives
US2559749A (en) 1950-06-29 1951-07-10 Du Pont Fluorinated aliphatic phosphates as emulsifying agents for aqueous polymerizations
US2597702A (en) 1950-06-29 1952-05-20 Du Pont Fluoroalkylphosphoric compounds
US2995542A (en) 1957-05-20 1961-08-08 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Fluorocarbon acrylic-type amides and polymers
US3112241A (en) 1960-09-06 1963-11-26 Du Pont Process of imparting oil-repellency to solid materials, and materials thus produced
US3145222A (en) 1961-02-23 1964-08-18 Du Pont Addition of polyfluoroalkyl iodides to unsaturated compounds and products produced thereby
US3256231A (en) 1961-05-03 1966-06-14 Du Pont Polymeric water and oil repellents
US3282905A (en) 1961-05-03 1966-11-01 Du Pont Fluorine containing esters and polymers thereof
US3083224A (en) 1961-12-08 1963-03-26 Du Pont Polyfluoroalkyl phosphates
US3194840A (en) 1961-12-18 1965-07-13 Procter & Gamble N, n-diloweralkyl, 1, 1-dihydrogen perfluoroalkyl amine oxides
US3351644A (en) 1962-07-24 1967-11-07 Pennsalt Chemicals Corp Preparation of telomeric acid fluorides
US3238235A (en) 1963-04-29 1966-03-01 Pennsalt Chemicals Corp Fluorinated amido carboxylic acids and salts thereof
GB1123379A (en) 1964-12-30 1968-08-14 Daikin Ind Ltd Fluorocarbon esters and polymers thereof
US3457247A (en) 1965-02-12 1969-07-22 Daikin Ind Ltd Fluorocarbon compounds and polymers thereof
US3351643A (en) 1965-08-09 1967-11-07 Pennsalt Chemicals Corp Coordination complexes
US3304278A (en) 1966-02-25 1967-02-14 Pennsalt Chemicals Corp Fluorinated unsaturated organic compounds and polymers thereof
GB1188815A (en) 1966-04-15 1970-04-22 Daikin Ind Ltd Fluorocarbon Esters and Polymers thereof
US3536749A (en) 1966-06-08 1970-10-27 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Fluorocarbon-acrylate products
US3491169A (en) 1966-07-22 1970-01-20 Du Pont Oil and water repellent
US3544663A (en) 1967-01-30 1970-12-01 Pennwalt Corp Fluorinated organic compounds and polymers thereof
US3450755A (en) 1967-02-23 1969-06-17 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Perfluoroalkyl sulfonamides and carboxamides
US3458571A (en) 1967-04-06 1969-07-29 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Fluorocarbon polyamines
US3532659A (en) 1967-04-26 1970-10-06 Pennsalt Chemicals Corp Fluorinated organic compounds and polymers thereof
US3497575A (en) 1967-06-30 1970-02-24 Geigy Chem Corp Polymers of perfluoroalkylamido-alkylthio methacrylates and acrylates
US3475333A (en) 1967-11-01 1969-10-28 Nat Foam System Inc Fire extinguishing
US3719698A (en) * 1967-11-27 1973-03-06 Stevens & Co Inc J P Polyfluorinated esters of acids containing silicon and amino groups
CH566569A4 (en) 1968-04-16 1973-02-28
US3498958A (en) 1968-06-27 1970-03-03 Nat Starch Chem Corp Water-and oil repellency agents
US3574518A (en) 1968-12-11 1971-04-13 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Collagen matrix waterproofing with chromium complexes containing radicals of long chain hydrocarbons and fluorinated hydrocarbons and product so produced
CH524578A (en) 1969-03-13 1972-06-30 Bayer Ag Process for the preparation of perfluoroalkanesulfonyl fluorides
US3636085A (en) 1969-04-01 1972-01-18 Ciba Geigy Corp Perfluoroalkylsulfonamido - alkyl esters of fumaric acid and other ethylenically unsaturated polybasic acids and polymers thereof
NL7103340A (en) 1970-03-19 1971-09-21
FR2088941A5 (en) 1970-04-30 1972-01-07 Ugine Kuhlmann
US3752783A (en) 1970-07-14 1973-08-14 Daikin Ind Ltd Water and oil repellent compositions containing fluoro resins and water soluble salt of guanidine
US3839425A (en) 1970-09-16 1974-10-01 Du Pont Perfluoroalkyletheramidoalkyl betaines and sulfobetaines
US3957657A (en) 1971-04-06 1976-05-18 Philadelphia Suburban Corporation Fire fighting
US4060489A (en) 1971-04-06 1977-11-29 Philadelphia Suburban Corporation Fire fighting with thixotropic foam
US4060132A (en) 1974-11-19 1977-11-29 Philadelphia Suburban Corporation Fire fighting with thixotropic foam
US3759981A (en) 1971-05-20 1973-09-18 Pennwalt Corp Esters of perfluoroalkyl terminated alkylene thioalkanoic acids
GB1401431A (en) 1971-08-06 1975-07-16 Haszeldine R N Preparation of fluoroalkane sulphides and the conversion thereof into fluoroalkane sulphonic acids
DE2239709A1 (en) * 1971-08-21 1973-02-22 Pennwalt Corp FLUORINE ALKYL SULFIDES AND THE METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING THEREOF
BE788214A (en) * 1971-09-01 1973-02-28 Ciba Geigy PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF 3-PERFLUOROALKYL-1-PROPENES
US3907576A (en) 1972-02-22 1975-09-23 Ciba Geigy Corp Compositions containing werner complexes of chromium and fluorinated carboxylic acids
CA1027129A (en) 1972-08-25 1978-02-28 Sameeh S. Toukan Fluorine and sulfur-containing compositions
US3899484A (en) 1972-08-25 1975-08-12 Pennwalt Corp Fluorinated phosphates
US3883596A (en) 1972-08-25 1975-05-13 Pennwalt Corp Fluorine and sulfur-containing compositions
US3906049A (en) 1972-08-25 1975-09-16 Pennwalt Corp Fluorine and sulfur-containing compositions
DE2247111B2 (en) 1972-09-26 1976-01-02 Asahi Glass Co. Ltd., Tokio Oil and water repellent for fiber products
JPS5629675B2 (en) 1973-03-23 1981-07-09
US4126633A (en) 1973-09-12 1978-11-21 Pennwalt Corporation Fluorinated aliphatic sulfides
US4043923A (en) 1974-02-26 1977-08-23 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Textile treatment composition
US4081399A (en) 1975-09-22 1978-03-28 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Process for the preparation of concentrated solutions of fluorinated amphoteric surfactants
US4000188A (en) 1975-12-19 1976-12-28 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Alkylthioamido sulfonic acids and derivatives thereof
US4387032A (en) 1976-03-25 1983-06-07 Enterra Corporation Concentrates for fire-fighting foam
JPS5377015A (en) 1976-12-16 1978-07-08 Asahi Glass Co Ltd Preparation of fluorine-containing phosphoric acid ester
US4089804A (en) 1976-12-30 1978-05-16 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Method of improving fluorinated surfactants
US4127711A (en) 1977-03-31 1978-11-28 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluorine-containing terpolymers
DE2749329A1 (en) 1977-11-04 1979-05-10 Hoechst Ag FLUORINE ALKYL SULFATO BETAINES AND PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION
DE2749330C2 (en) 1977-11-04 1983-04-21 Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt Mixture with improved surface-active properties
US4170636A (en) 1977-12-29 1979-10-09 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Composition and method for inhibiting plaque formation
US4134754A (en) 1978-03-23 1979-01-16 Gulf Oil Corporation Method of combating wild oats
JPS54135721A (en) 1978-04-13 1979-10-22 Daikin Ind Ltd Fluorine-containing betaine compound, its preparation and applications
US4147851A (en) 1978-06-13 1979-04-03 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluorine-containing oil- and water-repellant copolymers
JPS5566375A (en) 1978-08-17 1980-05-19 Hochiki Co Bubble fire extinguishing chemical for hydrophile inflammable liquid
JPS5545774A (en) * 1978-09-29 1980-03-31 Daikin Ind Ltd Epoxy resin composition
JPS5815146B2 (en) 1978-10-14 1983-03-24 ダイキン工業株式会社 Additive for fire extinguishing foam
US4192754A (en) 1978-12-28 1980-03-11 Allied Chemical Corporation Soil resistant yarn finish composition for synthetic organic polymer yarn
US4230495A (en) 1979-02-26 1980-10-28 The Mead Corporation Process for producing a pressure-sensitive carbonless copy sheet using microcapsules formed in situ in a radiation curable binder
US4464267A (en) 1979-03-06 1984-08-07 Enterra Corporation Preparing fire-fighting concentrates
US4317859A (en) 1979-03-27 1982-03-02 Monsanto Company Soil-resistant yarns
US4460480A (en) 1980-03-13 1984-07-17 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Protein hydrolyzate compositions for fire fighting containing perfluoroalkyl sulfide terminated oligomers
US4351946A (en) 1979-07-30 1982-09-28 Pennwalt Corporation Fluorinated heterocyclic sulfides
US4388212A (en) 1979-11-09 1983-06-14 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours & Co. Reducing surface tension with N-type betaines of 2-hydroxyl-1,1,2,3,3-pentahydroperfluoroalkylamines
US4283533A (en) 1979-11-09 1981-08-11 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company N-type betaines of 2-hydroxy-1,1,2,3,3-pentahydroperfluoroalkylamines
FR2476097A1 (en) 1980-02-19 1981-08-21 Ugine Kuhlmann
FR2477144A1 (en) 1980-02-29 1981-09-04 Ugine Kuhlmann NOVEL OXIDES OF PERFLUOROALKYL-GROUPED AMINES AND USE THEREOF IN EXTINCT COMPOSITIONS
EP0049958B1 (en) 1980-09-30 1986-11-05 Angus Fire Armour Limited Fire-fighting compositions
US4420434A (en) 1981-01-09 1983-12-13 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Perfluoralkyl anion/perfluoroalkyl cation ion pair complexes
US4472286A (en) 1981-01-09 1984-09-18 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Perfluoroalkyl anion/perfluoroalkyl cation ion pair complexes
US4600774A (en) 1981-01-30 1986-07-15 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Cyclic sulfoperfluoroaliphaticcarboxylic acid anhydrides and amide derivatives thereof
US4419298A (en) 1981-08-12 1983-12-06 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Ethanolamine salts of di-perfluoroalkyl group containing acids
US4486391A (en) 1981-08-25 1984-12-04 Dainippon Ink And Chemicals, Inc. Separation and recovery of ionic substances by fluorine-containing compound
JPS58136231U (en) 1982-03-04 1983-09-13 有限会社新城製作所 Nut holding device in automatic pierce nut assembly machine
JPS5932471A (en) 1982-08-16 1984-02-21 ダイキン工業株式会社 Aqueous composition for fire extinguishment
US4591473A (en) 1982-11-12 1986-05-27 Allied Corporation Method of spinning a nylon yarn having improved retention of a soil repellent finish on the nylon yarn
FR2540131B1 (en) 1983-01-28 1986-04-04 Atochem COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD FOR OLEOPHOBIC AND HYDROPHOBIC TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
FR2575165B1 (en) 1984-12-26 1987-01-23 Atochem FLUORINATED TELOMERS HAVING HYDROPHILIC GROUPS, THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS AND THEIR USE AS SURFACTANTS IN AQUEOUS MEDIA, IN PARTICULAR AS ADDITIVES TO FIRE PROTEIN EMULSERS
IT1186704B (en) 1985-04-04 1987-12-16 Motefluos Spa PERFLUORCALCANI AND ALOPERFLUOROALCANI, THEIR PRECURSORS AND THEIR SYNTHESIS PROCESS
US4697011A (en) 1985-07-24 1987-09-29 Research Corporation N-fluoro-N-perfluoromethyl sulfonamides
DE3600108A1 (en) 1986-01-04 1987-07-09 Hoechst Ag 2-IOD PERFLUOR-2-METHYLALKANES, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION AND USE THEREOF
US4720578A (en) 1986-07-23 1988-01-19 Gaf Corporation Preparation of fluorinated carboxypropylated non-ionic surfactants
DE3640875A1 (en) 1986-11-29 1988-06-09 Basf Ag THERMOPLASTIC MOLDING MATERIALS BASED ON POLYCARBONATES, POLYESTERS AND POLYAMIDS
JPS6474268A (en) 1987-09-14 1989-03-20 Shinetsu Chemical Co Curable silicone composition
US4898981A (en) 1988-06-20 1990-02-06 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Heteroatom containing perfluoroalkyl terminated neopentyl glycols and compositions therefrom
JPH02286758A (en) * 1989-04-28 1990-11-26 Dainichiseika Color & Chem Mfg Co Ltd Coating composition
FR2647112A1 (en) 1989-05-22 1990-11-23 Atochem NITROGEN POLYFLUORALKYL COMPOUNDS, PROCESSES FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
JP3008493B2 (en) * 1989-12-01 2000-02-14 大日本インキ化学工業株式会社 Insulated wire and its manufacturing method
US5132445A (en) 1990-04-20 1992-07-21 Ciba-Geigy Corporation 5,5-bis (perfluoroalkylheteromethyl)-2-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,3,2-dioxaphosphorinanes, and salts or esters thereof
US5091550A (en) 1990-04-20 1992-02-25 Ciba-Geigy Corporation 5,5-bis (perfluoroalkylheteromethyl)-2-hydroxy-2-oxo-1,3,2-dioxaphosphorinanes, derived acyclic phosphorus acids and salts or esters thereof
US5045634A (en) 1990-06-28 1991-09-03 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluorination of haloolefins
FR2665705B1 (en) 1990-08-09 1993-07-30 Atta NOVEL AMPHIPHILIC FLUORINATED DERIVATIVES WITH A TELOMERIC STRUCTURE, PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE IN PREPARATIONS FOR BIOMEDICAL USE.
DE4026097A1 (en) 1990-08-17 1992-02-20 Hoechst Ag AQUEOUS DISPERSION OF FLUORINE POLYMERS
US5171902A (en) * 1990-10-11 1992-12-15 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Saturated linear polyfluorohydrocarbons, processes for their production, and their use in cleaning compositions
DE69027432T2 (en) * 1990-10-11 1997-01-23 Dainichiseika Color Chem Coating composition
US5218021A (en) 1991-06-27 1993-06-08 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Compositions for polar solvent fire fighting containing perfluoroalkyl terminated co-oligomer concentrates and polysaccharides
FR2683535B1 (en) 1991-11-12 1994-10-28 Atochem NOVEL FLUORINATED COPOLYMERS AND THEIR USE FOR COATING AND IMPREGNATION OF VARIOUS SUBSTRATES.
US5368972A (en) * 1992-02-15 1994-11-29 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Method of preparing composite particles comprising adhering wax particles to the surface of resin particles
US5605882A (en) 1992-05-28 1997-02-25 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Azeotrope(like) compositions of pentafluorodimethyl ether and difluoromethane
US5310870A (en) 1992-08-13 1994-05-10 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluoroalkene/hydrofluorocarbon telomers and their synthesis
US5391721A (en) 1993-02-04 1995-02-21 Wormald U.S., Inc. Aqueous film forming foam concentrates for hydrophilic combustible liquids and method for modifying viscosity of same
US5639845A (en) 1993-06-10 1997-06-17 Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. Method for the preparation of a fluorine-containing organopolysiloxane
US5395997A (en) 1993-07-29 1995-03-07 Alliedsignal Inc. Process for the preparation of hydrofluorocarbons having 3 to 7 carbon atoms
US5534192A (en) 1993-11-18 1996-07-09 Henkel Corporation Composition and method for treating substrates to reduce electrostatic charge and resultant article
US5478486A (en) 1993-11-18 1995-12-26 Henkel Corporation Composition and method for treating substrates to reduce electrostatic charge and resultant article
EP0671382B1 (en) 1994-03-09 1998-10-14 Clariant GmbH Fluorinated carboxybetaines and alkylsulfobetaines as well as the mixtures thereof with saturated fluoroalkylamines
DE4418309A1 (en) 1994-05-26 1995-11-30 Bayer Ag Water=sol, =emulsifiable or =dispersible resin contg perfluoroalkyl gps,
DE4418308A1 (en) 1994-05-26 1995-11-30 Bayer Ag Aq. self-crosslinking compsn. contg. alkoxy:silane with per:fluoroalkyl gps.
JP3818395B2 (en) 1994-06-30 2006-09-06 独立行政法人産業技術総合研究所 Fluorinated alkene derivative and method for producing fluorinated alkane derivative
US5491261A (en) 1994-07-01 1996-02-13 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Poly-perfluoroalkyl-substituted alcohols and acids, and derivatives thereof
JPH0845066A (en) * 1994-07-29 1996-02-16 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Magnetic recording medium
US5629372A (en) 1994-11-22 1997-05-13 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Acrylic fluorocarbon polymer containing coating
FR2727417B1 (en) 1994-11-29 1997-01-03 Atochem Elf Sa CATIONIC FLUORINE COPOLYMERS FOR OLEOPHOBIC AND HYDROPHOBIC TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
HU218480B (en) 1995-06-15 2000-09-28 BIOREX Kutató és Fejlesztő Rt. Hydroxylamine derivatives, process for producing them and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US5827919A (en) 1995-10-06 1998-10-27 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluorourethane additives for water-dispersed coating compositions
US6235951B1 (en) 1996-01-17 2001-05-22 Central Glass Company, Limited Method for producing 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane
JP3211656B2 (en) 1996-03-18 2001-09-25 信越化学工業株式会社 Water-soluble fiber treating agent and method for producing the same
US5674961A (en) 1996-04-12 1997-10-07 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Oil water and solvent resistant paper by treatment with fluorochemical copolymers
TW377370B (en) 1996-04-12 1999-12-21 Du Pont Waterborne fluoropolymer solutions for treating hard surfaces
US6015838A (en) 1996-11-04 2000-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Aqueous film-forming foam compositions
JPH10195038A (en) * 1996-11-13 1998-07-28 Hokuriku Seiyaku Co Ltd Benzenesulfonamide derivative and medicine containing the same derivative
JP3731273B2 (en) 1997-01-29 2006-01-05 ダイキン工業株式会社 Copolymer and antifouling agent containing the same
US6197378B1 (en) 1997-05-05 2001-03-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Treatment of fibrous substrates to impart repellency, stain resistance, and soil resistance
JPH1121259A (en) * 1997-07-02 1999-01-26 Kao Corp Production of fluorine-containing ether compound
JPH1129508A (en) * 1997-07-08 1999-02-02 Neos Co Ltd Electrically sensitive compound, electrically sensitive composition and use thereof
TW494125B (en) 1997-07-11 2002-07-11 Rohm And Haas Compary Preparation of fluorinated polymers
US6031141A (en) 1997-08-25 2000-02-29 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fluoroolefin manufacturing process
DE59706352D1 (en) 1997-11-06 2002-03-21 Max Planck Gesellschaft SELF-ORGANIZING COATINGS
US6120892A (en) 1997-11-20 2000-09-19 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Waterborne fluoropolymer solutions for treating hard surfaces
JP3721772B2 (en) 1998-03-06 2005-11-30 ユニマテック株式会社 Water and oil repellent
US6383569B2 (en) 1998-07-24 2002-05-07 Ciba Specialty Chemicals Corporation Compositions and methods to protect calcitic and/or siliceous materials
JP2002521299A (en) 1998-07-24 2002-07-16 チバ スペシャルティ ケミカルズ ホールディング インコーポレーテッド Compositions and methods for protecting calcite and / or siliceous surfaces
US6379578B1 (en) 1998-08-14 2002-04-30 Gtl Co., Ltd. Water-based foam fire extinguisher
US6326436B2 (en) 1998-08-21 2001-12-04 Dupont Dow Elastomers, L.L.C. Fluoroelastomer composition having excellent processability and low temperature properties
JP2000126327A (en) 1998-10-28 2000-05-09 Daiichi Kasei Sangyo Kk Aqueous film foam fire extinguishing agent
JP3804735B2 (en) 1998-11-26 2006-08-02 コニカミノルタホールディングス株式会社 Antireflection agent, antireflection material, polarizing plate protective film, and polarizing plate
CA2257028C (en) 1998-12-24 2003-11-18 Fracmaster Ltd. Liquid co2/hydrocarbon oil emulsion fracturing system
US6117353A (en) 1999-01-11 2000-09-12 3M Innovative Properties Company High solids spin finish composition comprising a hydrocarbon surfactant and a fluorochemical emulsion
US6814880B1 (en) 1999-02-25 2004-11-09 Cognis Deutschland Gmbh & Co. Kg Water based liquid foam extinguishing formulation
US6525127B1 (en) 1999-05-11 2003-02-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Alkylated fluorochemical oligomers and use thereof in the treatment of fibrous substrates
US6297308B1 (en) 1999-10-07 2001-10-02 3M Innovative Properties Company Chemical compositions
WO2001027235A1 (en) 1999-10-07 2001-04-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Processes for removing water from the surface of a substrate
US6451717B1 (en) 1999-12-14 2002-09-17 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Highly durable oil/water repellents for textiles
EP1272539A1 (en) 2000-04-14 2003-01-08 Ciba Spezialitätenchemie Pfersee GmbH Fluorinated polymeric paper sizes and soil-release agents
AU2001273163A1 (en) 2000-07-07 2002-01-21 Milliken & Company Textile substrates having improved durable water repellency and soil release andmethod for producing same
US6783927B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2004-08-31 Fuji Photo Film, Co., Ltd. Photothermographic material
US6294107B1 (en) 2000-07-26 2001-09-25 Basf Corporation Alkylene oxide modified silicone glycol compatibilizing agents for stable polyester polyol compositions
US6646088B2 (en) 2000-08-16 2003-11-11 3M Innovative Properties Company Urethane-based stain-release coatings
DE10059833A1 (en) 2000-12-01 2002-06-13 Clariant Gmbh Fluorine-modified comb polymers based on acryloyldimethylauric acid
US6803109B2 (en) 2001-03-09 2004-10-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Water-and oil-repellency imparting urethane oligomers comprising perfluoroalkyl moieties
US6803425B2 (en) 2001-04-12 2004-10-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluoropolymers having pendant imidate structures
RU2184698C1 (en) 2001-05-08 2002-07-10 Закрытое акционерное общество Научно-производственное объединение "ПиМ-Инвест" Method of nitrogen trifluoride production
US6660828B2 (en) 2001-05-14 2003-12-09 Omnova Solutions Inc. Fluorinated short carbon atom side chain and polar group containing polymer, and flow, or leveling, or wetting agents thereof
CA2451547A1 (en) 2001-06-18 2002-12-27 David Nalewajek Fluorine-containing compounds and polymers derived therefrom
US6653511B2 (en) 2001-07-10 2003-11-25 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Perfluoropolyether primary bromides and iodides
EP1412321A2 (en) 2001-07-25 2004-04-28 Ciba Specialty Chemicals Holding Inc. Perfluoroalkyl-substituted amines, acids, amino acids and thioether acids
US7105270B2 (en) 2002-01-31 2006-09-12 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Fluoroaliphatic group-containing copolymer
US6824754B2 (en) 2002-03-13 2004-11-30 Council Of Scientific And Industrial Research Solid state thermal method for the synthesis of lithium hexafluoro phosphate (LiPF)6 as battery electrolyte
US6822059B2 (en) 2002-04-05 2004-11-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Dispersions containing bicomponent fluoropolymer particles and use thereof
JP2003312156A (en) 2002-04-26 2003-11-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image receiving sheet
US6824882B2 (en) 2002-05-31 2004-11-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluorinated phosphonic acids
US7176232B2 (en) 2002-06-24 2007-02-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Salinosporamides and methods for use thereof
GB0314050D0 (en) 2003-06-17 2003-07-23 Unilever Plc Dispensing device
US7345016B2 (en) 2003-06-27 2008-03-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Photo bleach lipophilic fluid cleaning compositions
FR2856599A1 (en) 2003-06-30 2004-12-31 Commissariat Energie Atomique USE OF COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING A SOLUBLE FORM OF HLA-G IN THE TREATMENT OF BLOOD PATHOLOGIES
SK50112006A3 (en) 2003-07-02 2006-05-04 Egis Gy�Gyszergy�R Rt. Process for preparation of amorphous form of platelet aggregation inhibitor drug

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of EP1718722A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1718722A2 (en) 2006-11-08
US20080009655A1 (en) 2008-01-10
JP2007526912A (en) 2007-09-20
US7943567B2 (en) 2011-05-17
WO2005074594A3 (en) 2006-03-30
CA2554293A1 (en) 2005-08-18
EP1718722A4 (en) 2012-08-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1718723A2 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
KR20060136432A (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
WO2005074593A2 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
US20110213113A1 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film
US20090137773A1 (en) Production Processes and Systems, Compositions, Surfactants, Monomer Units, Metal Complexes, Phosphate Esters, Glycols, Aqueous Film Forming Foams, and Foam Stabilizers
WO2005074637A2 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
KR20070101402A (en) Fluorinated compounds
KR20060136433A (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
EP1718722A2 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
US8318656B2 (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
MXPA06008629A (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
MXPA06008626A (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers
MXPA06008628A (en) Production processes and systems, compositions, surfactants, monomer units, metal complexes, phosphate esters, glycols, aqueous film forming foams, and foam stabilizers

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2554293

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006551579

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: PA/a/2006/008626

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 2005712546

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020067015478

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2409/KOLNP/2006

Country of ref document: IN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200580010750.6

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005712546

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020067015478

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10587444

Country of ref document: US

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 10587444

Country of ref document: US